Sie sind auf Seite 1von 1116

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

V100R011C00

Configuration Guide

Issue 01
Date 2016-10-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R011C00

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R011C00

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R011C00

iManager U2000 V200R016C50

iManager U2000 Web LCT V200R016C50

Intended Audience
This document describes how to configure optical network elements, WDM services, and
Ethernet services.

This document is intended for:

l Installation and commissioning engineers


l Data configuration engineers
l System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk,


which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
WARNING injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder .

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Based on Product Version


V100R011C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R011C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C10, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2016-03-10) Based on Product Version


V100R010C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C10.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2015-09-06) Based on Product Version


V100R010C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R010C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-12-01) Based on Product Version


V100R009C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C10.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-11-10) Based on Product Version


V100R009C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.
Compared with the 01 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

Whole manual 3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station), 3.2
Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station), 4 Configuring the
THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station), 5 Configuring the LOA
Board (Manually by Station), 6 Configuring Universal Line
Boards, 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)
and 12 Configuration Tasks: Optimized the operation procedure and
added operation screenshots.
Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-08-30) Based on Product Version V100R009C00


This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R009C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

11.2.5.1 The method of configuring attributes of UNI ports for transmission of


Configuring Both C-VLAN and S-VLAN services is added.
UNI Port
Attributes

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version


V100R008C10
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with the 02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

8 Configuring 8.9 Configuration Example: 10GE LAN->ODU2->OTU2 Under


WDM Services Client 1+1 Protection is added.
(by Trail)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-07-31) Based on Product Version


V100R008C10
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with the 01 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-03-31) Based on Product Version


V100R008C10
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C10.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-04-30) Based on Product Version


V100R008C00
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with the 02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-12-31) Based on Product Version


V100R008C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with the 01 issue, updating of SPC120 and SPC200 are added.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

8 Configuring Added are as below:


WDM Services l 8.7 Activating WDM Trails.
(by Trail)

6 Configuring Modified are as below:


Universal Line l Configuration Procedures.
Boards
l Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Station.

11.2 Added are as below:


Configuring an l 11.2.3.3 Allocating IP Addresses to Ports Automatically.
Ethernet
Service on a l 11.2.4.3 Configuring Tunnels in Batches.
Packet Network Modified are as below:
in E2E Mode l 11.2.2 E2E Service Configuration Procedure.
l 11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links.

11.4 Managing Added are as below:


Services l 11.4.3 Managing VPLS Services.
l Checking the Composite Service Status.
l Modifying Composite Services.
l Deleting Composite Services.
l 11.4.6 Performing Performance Monitoring Based on Service
Paths.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-07-30) Based on Product Version


V100R008C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R008C00.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Added are as below:


l 6 Configuring Universal Line Boards.
l 11.4.7 Querying Service Trail Performance By PMS System.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

11.3 Modified are as below:


Configuring an l Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports.
Ethernet
Service on a l Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis.
Packet Network l Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links.
in Single Site
Mode

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 05 (2014-03-10) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 04 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-09-19) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 03 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2013-07-05) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 02 issue, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

11 Configuring 11.4.5 Searching for the Service Path is added.


Ethernet
Services
(Packet)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2013-04-20) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with the 01 issue, updating of SPC100 and SPC200 are added.

Update Description

Whole manual l The required U2000 version is changed from V100R008C01 to


V100R008C00.
l Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-11-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C02
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C02.
Compared with OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 05 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the issue 04, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-08-19) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

A Parameters l "Max. Frame Length (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port
Attribute)" is deleted.
l "Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is
deleted.
l "MAC Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.
l "Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is
deleted.
l "QinQ Type Area" is deleted.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed in this version.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-12-15) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the issue 02, updating of SPC200 is added.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN52TOM
Board (by
Station)

4 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the LOA Board
(Manually by
Station)

8 Configuring 8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow is added.


WDM Services 8.3 Creating OCh Trails is added.
(by Trail)
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails is added.
8.5 Creating Client Trails is added.

11 Configuring 11.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in E2E


Ethernet Mode is added.
Services
(Packet)

12 Configuring the Line Rate is added.


Configuration 12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte is added.
Tasks

A Parameters l "Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Working Mode" is deleted.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-9-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00. Only
the issue number is updated.

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-07-30) Based on Product Version


V100R007C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R007C00.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Added are as below:


l 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).

Modified are as below:


l 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This
Manual.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified.


WDM Services l Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3
(Manually by Boards is added.
Station)
l "Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2
Switching Function" is deleted.

3.1 Configuring Overview of the Working Modes is added.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring l Overview of the Working Modes is modified.


the TN52TOM l The titles of examples and the sequence numbers of application
Board (by scenarios are modified so that they are the same as those in the
Station) Hardware Description.

4 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the THA/TOA l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
Board
(Manually by l The service signal flow and configuration process of each
Station) application scenario are modified.

5 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the LOA Board l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
(Manually by
Station)

9 Configuring The SDH service configuration is optimized. To be specific, contents


the SDH are added, modified, or deleted.
Services

10 Configuring l The Ethernet service configuration is optimized. To be specific,


Ethernet contents are added, modified, or deleted.
Services(EoO/E l Contents about EoS-based Ethernet services are added.
oW/EoS)

12.9 Modifying This chapter is deleted. Modifying Port and 12.9.2 Modifying the
the Services Configuration are moved to 12 Configuration Tasks.
Configuration
Data

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

12 l Configuring the Working Mode is modified.


Configuration l Creating Cross-Connections is modified.
Tasks
l "Creating a VLAN Group" is deleted.
l "Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses" is deleted.
l "Configuring MAC Address Filtering" removes to Feature
Description.
l "Configuring Port Mirroring" removes to Supporting Tasks.
l "Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults" is deleted.
l "Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring" removes to Feature
Description.

Updates in Issue 04 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified.


WDM Services l 2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow is modified.
(Manually by
Station) l Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3
Boards is added.
l "Configuring WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2
Switching Function" is deleted.

3.1 Configuring Overview of the Working Modes is added.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring l Overview of the Working Modes is modified.


the TN52TOM l The titles of examples and the sequence numbers of application
Board (by scenarios are modified so that they are the same as those in the
Station) Hardware Description.

4 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the THA/TOA l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
Board
(Manually by
Station)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Configuring l Overview of the Working Mode is modified.


the LOA Board l 5.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.
(Manually by
Station)

9 Configuring The SDH service configuration is optimized. To be specific, contents


the SDH are added, modified, or deleted.
Services

10 Configuring l The Ethernet service configuration is optimized. To be specific,


Ethernet contents are added, modified, or deleted.
Services(EoO/E l Contents about EoS-based Ethernet services are added.
oW/EoS)

12.9 Modifying This chapter is deleted. Modifying Port and 12.9.2 Modifying the
the Services Configuration are moved to 12 Configuration Tasks.
Configuration
Data

12 l Configuring the Working Mode is modified.


Configuration l Configuring the Service Type is modified.
Tasks
l 12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte is added.
l "Creating a VLAN Group" is deleted.
l "Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses" is deleted.
l "Configuring MAC Address Filtering" removes to Feature
Description.
l "Configuring Port Mirroring" removes to Supporting Tasks.
l "Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults" is deleted.
l "Configuring Non-Intrusive Monitoring" removes to Feature
Description.

Parameters l "Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Working Mode" is deleted.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the issue 02, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading) is added.


the TN11TOM l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
Board modified.
(Manually by
Station) l Application Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading) is
modified.
l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)
is modified.
l Application Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical
regeneration board) is modified.
l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is deleted.

4 Configuring 4.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

5 Configuring 5.2 Configuration Procedures is modified.


the LOA Board
(Manually by
Station)

12.9 Modifying l Conversion Between EVPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP
the Services is modified.
Configuration l Converting an EVPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service is
Data modified.
l Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EVPL Ethernet Service is
modified.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-12-15) Based on Product Version


V100R006C03
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C03.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Configuring "Configuring the TEM28 Board" is added.


Ethernet Services
(TEM28 Board)

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


the TN11TOM is modified.
Board l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
(Manually by Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is modified.
Station)
l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
modified.

3.2 Configuring Application Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) is


the TN52TOM modified.
Board (by
Station)

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-06-30) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN11TOM
Board
(Manually by
Station)

3.2 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the TN52TOM
Board (by
Station)

4 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

5 Configuring The configuration process is optimized.


the LOA Board
(Manually by
Station)

8 Configuring 8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow is added.


WDM Services 8.3 Creating OCh Trails is added.
(by Trail)
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails is added.
8.5 Creating Client Trails is added.

12 Configuring the Line Rate is added.


Configuration 12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte is added.
Tasks

Parameters l "Port Physical Parameters (Ethernet Port Attribute)" is deleted.


Description l "Working Mode" is deleted.

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the issue 02, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


the TN11TOM is modified.
Board l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
(Manually by Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is modified.
Station)
l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
modified.

3.2 Configuring Application Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) is


the TN52TOM modified.
Board (by
Station)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is modified.


WDM Services l 2.1.3 ODUflex is modified.
(Manually by
Station)

Application l Configuration Process is modified.


Scenario 5:
ODUflex Non-
Convergence
Mode

Application l Configuration Process is modified.


Scenario 4:
ODUflex non-
convergence
mode

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version


V100R006C01
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Structure is adjusted.


l The title of some chapters are changed.
l 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This
Manual is added.
l 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station) is added.
l 7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package) is
added.
l The chapter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to
Commissioning Guide.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

2 Configuring l Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) is added.


WDM Services l 2.1.3 ODUflex is added.
(Manually by
Station) l The chapter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and
Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

4 Configuring l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is added.


the THA/TOA l Application Scenario 5: ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode is
Board added.
(Manually by
Station)

12.9 Modifying "Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and


the "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.
Configuration
Data

12 Configuring the Working Mode is added.


Configuration
Tasks

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version


V100R006C00
Update Description

Whole manual l Structure is adjusted.


l The chapter Managing NE Power Consumption removes to
Commissioning Guide.

2 Configuring l The chapter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and
WDM Services Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.
(Manually by
Station)

4 Configuring l 4.2 Configuration Procedures is added.


the THA/TOA
Board
(Manually by
Station)

12.9 Modifying "Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and


the "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.
Configuration
Data

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

12 Configuring the Working Mode is added.


Configuration
Tasks

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version


V100R006C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual Add the chapter 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by
Station).

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version


V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00.
Compared with the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00, the manual of this issue
provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process".


l Delete the "Quick Guide".
l Delete the "Creating a Network".
l Delete the "Performance Management".
l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming".
l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services".
l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".

2 Configuring The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM


WDM Services Services" to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".
(Manually by
Station)

8 Configuring Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.


WDM Services
(by Trail)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 05 (2012-05-30) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the fifth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the issue 04, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

3.1 Configuring l Application Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


the TN11TOM is modified.
Board l "Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven
(Manually by Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal" is modified.
Station)
l Application Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading) is
modified.

3.2 Configuring Application Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading) is


the TN52TOM modified.
Board (by
Station)

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2011-08-30) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the fourth official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the issue 03, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Whole manual l Delete the "WDM Network Management Process".


l Delete the "Quick Guide".
l Delete the "Creating a Network".
l Delete the "Performance Management".
l Delete the "Configuring Wavelength Grooming".
l Delete the "Configuring Broadcast Data Port Services".
l Delete the "Backing Up and Restoring the NE Data".
l Delete the "NE Power Consumption".

2 Configuring l The name of the chapter is changed from "Configuring WDM


WDM Services Services" to "Configuring WDM Services (By Station)".
(Manually by l The charpter Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and
Station) Line Boards (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is deleted.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

8 Configuring Make configuring WDM Services by trail as an independent chapter.


WDM Services
(by Trail)

12.9 Modifying "Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service" and


the "Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service" are deleted.
Configuration
Data

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-05-25) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
Update Description

Whole manual Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the issue 01, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.

Update Description

Configuring Modify the "service signal flow".


WDM Services
for Tributary
Boards and Line
Boards (with
ODUK SNCP
Protection)

8.8 Modify the "configuration process".


Configuration
Example: GE-
>ODU1->OTU2
Under ODUk
SNCP
Protection

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

Configuration Modify the "configuration process".


Example:
Configuring EPL
Services on a
WDM Network

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-10-30) Based on Product Version


V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.

Update Description

Creating OCh Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.


Trails by Trail
Search

2.3 Configuring 2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-
WDM Services Connect Capability, 2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU
for OTU Boards Boards with Cross-Connect Capability, 2.5 Configuring WDM
Without Cross- Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards, and Configuring
Connect WDM Services for Boards with the Layer 2 Switching Function are
Capability added.
2.4 Configuring
WDM Services
for OTU Boards
with Cross-
Connect
Capability
2.5 Configuring
WDM Services
for Tributary
Boards and
Line Boards
Configuring
WDM Services
for Boards with
the Layer 2
Switching
Function

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

8.10 8.10 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration is added.


Parameters:
End to End
Service
Configuration

Configuring Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards
WDM Services (with ODUK SNCP Protection) is added.
for Tributary
Boards and Line
Boards (with
ODUK SNCP
Protection)

8.8 The name of the section is changed from "Configuring End-to-End GE


Configuration Services" to "Configuring GE Services (By Trail)".
Example: GE-
>ODU1->OTU2
Under ODUk
SNCP
Protection

Configuring the Sections "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE


Transparent Service", "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN
Transmission of Services", "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN
the GE Service Service", and "Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH
Configuring the Services" are deleted.
Transparent
Transmission of
the SAN
Services
Configuring the
Transparent
Transmission of
the OTN Service
Configuring the
Transparent
Transmission of
the SDH
Services

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide About This Document

Update Description

Configuration Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d


Example: Bridge) on a WDM Network, Configuration Example: Configuring
Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a WDM Network,
EPLAN Services Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1
(IEEE 802.1d ad Bridge) on a WDM Network, and Configuration Example:
Bridge) on a Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a
WDM Network WDM Network are added.
Configuration
Example:
Configuring
EVPLAN
Services (IEEE
802.1q Bridge)
on a WDM
Network
Configuration
Example:
Configuring
EVPLAN
Services (IEEE
802.1 ad Bridge)
on a WDM
Network
Configuration
Example:
Configuring
EVPL and
EVPLAN
Services (IEEE
802.1q Bridge)
on a WDM
Network

Configuring the Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards is added.


Receive
Wavelength of
Boards

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This Manual.............................. 1
2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)...............................................................4
2.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-Connections..............................................................................6
2.1.1.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections.................................................................................................................6
2.1.1.2 Intra-board Electrical Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................10
2.1.2 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode...................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 ODUflex.................................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow.............................................................................................................................. 22
2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability..................................................... 25
2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................25
2.3.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................26
2.3.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................26
2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability........................................................... 27
2.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................27
2.4.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................28
2.4.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................29
2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards............................................................................32
2.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................32
2.5.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................33
2.5.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................33
2.6 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards.......................................................................38
2.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................38
2.6.2 Service Signal Flow...................................................................................................................................................39
2.6.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................40
2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3 Boards....................................................................... 45
2.8 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................................... 49
2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration....................................................................................................................49
2.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration...................................................................................................................................51

3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM Board by Station..........................53


3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)...........................................................................................54

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

3.1.1 Overview of the Working Modes.............................................................................................................................. 54


3.1.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)......................................................................................................... 55
3.1.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading).................................................................................................. 61
3.1.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading).................................................................................................. 70
3.1.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)...........................................................................................76
3.1.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board).................................................................... 84
3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)...........................................................................................................90
3.2.1 Overview of the Working Modes.............................................................................................................................. 90
3.2.2 Configuration Principles............................................................................................................................................92
3.2.3 Configuration Flow....................................................................................................................................................94
3.2.4 Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (cascading)........................................................................................................................ 96
3.2.5 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (cascading)................................................................................................ 103
3.2.6 Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (cascading)...................................................................................................................... 111
3.2.7 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)................................................................................................ 115
3.2.8 Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (non-cascading)...............................................................................................................122
3.2.9 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).........................................................................................130
3.2.10 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading).............................................................................................................138
3.2.11 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)..............................................144
3.2.12 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading)....................... 151
3.2.13 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).....................................................................................160
3.2.14 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading).............................................................................................. 171
3.2.15 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)........................................................ 176

4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)................................................ 183


4.1 Overview of the Working Mode................................................................................................................................. 185
4.2 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................................... 185
4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)....................................................................................... 197
4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)....................................................................................... 205
4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)...........................................................................................212
4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)......................................................................................220
4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)...............................................................................226

5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)...........................................................234


5.1 Overview of the Working Mode................................................................................................................................. 235
5.2 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................................... 235
5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).......................................... 247
5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)................................................ 254
5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).........................................260
5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)...................................................268
5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)..........................................................................273

6 Configuring Universal Line Boards.......................................................................................278


6.1 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................................................................... 279
6.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths............................................................................................................281

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

6.2.1 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Station....................................................................................... 281


6.2.2 Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths by Trail...........................................................................................286

7 Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)............................................... 289


7.1 Overview of the Service Packages............................................................................................................................. 290
7.1.1 Service Packages for the TN52TOM Board............................................................................................................ 290
7.1.2 Service Packages for the THA/TOA Board.............................................................................................................293
7.1.3 Service Packages for the LOA Board......................................................................................................................293
7.2 Configuring Service Packages....................................................................................................................................294

8 Configuring WDM Services (by Trail)..................................................................................304


8.1 WDM Trails................................................................................................................................................................306
8.2 E2E WDM Trail Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................307
8.3 Creating OCh Trails....................................................................................................................................................309
8.4 Creating ODUk Trails.................................................................................................................................................314
8.5 Creating Client Trails..................................................................................................................................................316
8.6 Searching for WDM Trails......................................................................................................................................... 321
8.7 Activating WDM Trails.............................................................................................................................................. 322
8.8 Configuration Example: GE->ODU1->OTU2 Under ODUk SNCP Protection........................................................ 322
8.8.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 323
8.8.2 Service Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................324
8.9 Configuration Example: 10GE LAN->ODU2->OTU2 Under Client 1+1 Protection............................................... 328
8.9.1 Example Description............................................................................................................................................... 328
8.9.2 Service Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................330
8.10 Parameters: End to End Service Configuration........................................................................................................ 334

9 Configuring the SDH Services............................................................................................... 338


9.1 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................... 341
9.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain................................................................................................... 342
9.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 342
9.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 342
9.2.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................343
9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring.....................................................................................................345
9.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 345
9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 345
9.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................346
9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services...................................................................................................................... 349
9.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 349
9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 349
9.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................351
9.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services........................................................................................................................353
9.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 353
9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 353
9.5.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................354

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxviii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

9.6 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services...................................................................................356


9.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................356
9.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 357
9.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................358
9.7 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services................................................................................................. 361
9.7.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 361
9.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 362
9.7.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................363
9.8 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring...................................................................................................................... 366
9.8.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 366
9.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................................... 367
9.8.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................369
9.9 Configuring the SNCP Ring Services........................................................................................................................ 372
9.9.1 Configuration Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................372
9.9.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation......................................................................................................... 373
9.9.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................374
9.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain.................................................................. 378
9.10.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 378
9.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 379
9.10.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................380
9.11 Configuring Service on the MSP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain...................................................................... 385
9.11.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 385
9.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 386
9.11.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................387
9.12 Configuring the MSP Tangent Ring Services...........................................................................................................390
9.12.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................390
9.12.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 391
9.12.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................393
9.13 Configuring the MSP Intersecting Ring Services.....................................................................................................396
9.13.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................397
9.13.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 397
9.13.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................399
9.14 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services.........................................................................................................406
9.14.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................406
9.14.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 407
9.14.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................408
9.15 Configuring the SNCP Intersecting Ring Services...................................................................................................414
9.15.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................414
9.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation....................................................................................................... 415
9.15.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................417
9.16 Configuring the Services on Two Tangent SNCP and MSP Rings.......................................................................... 426
9.16.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 426

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

9.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 427


9.16.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................428
9.17 Configuring the Services on Two Intersecting SNCP and MSP Rings.................................................................... 433
9.17.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................. 434
9.17.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................................... 434
9.17.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................435
9.18 Configuration Task Collection..................................................................................................................................441
9.18.1 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections................................................................................................................... 441
9.18.1.1 Querying Lower Order Cross-Connection Resources........................................................................................ 441
9.18.1.2 Creating the SDH Service...................................................................................................................................442
9.18.1.3 Verifying the Service Configuration...................................................................................................................443
9.18.2 Configuring the Protection Subnet........................................................................................................................ 445
9.18.2.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain..................................................................................................................445
9.18.2.2 Configuring a Non-Protection Ring................................................................................................................... 446
9.18.2.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.............................................................................................................447
9.18.2.4 Creating a Linear MS Protection Subnet............................................................................................................ 449
9.18.3 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services......................................................................................................452
9.18.3.1 Configuring Trace Byte...................................................................................................................................... 452
9.18.3.2 Configuring C2 Byte.......................................................................................................................................... 453
9.18.4 Modifying the Configuration Data........................................................................................................................ 455
9.18.4.1 Configuring SDH Services................................................................................................................................. 455
9.18.4.2 Deleting SDH Services....................................................................................................................................... 456
9.18.4.3 Converting a Non-Protection Service to an SNCP Service................................................................................ 457
9.18.4.4 Converting an SNCP Service to a Non-Protection Service................................................................................ 458
9.18.5 Modifying Protection Subnets(SDH).................................................................................................................... 459
9.18.5.1 Deleting Protection Subnets............................................................................................................................... 459
9.18.5.2 Modifying Protection Subnet Parameters...........................................................................................................460

10 Configuring Ethernet Services(EoO/EoW/EoS)................................................................. 461


10.1 Supported Ethernet Service ModelsEPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN........................................................................ 463
10.2 Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................................... 467
10.2.1 VLAN and QinQ................................................................................................................................................... 467
10.2.2 External Ports and Internal Ports........................................................................................................................... 469
10.2.2.1 Tag Attributes..................................................................................................................................................... 470
10.2.2.2 Auto-negotiation................................................................................................................................................. 471
10.2.2.3 Flow Control.......................................................................................................................................................471
10.2.3 VLAN Static Multicast.......................................................................................................................................... 472
10.2.4 Virtual Bridge........................................................................................................................................................ 473
10.3 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................477
10.4 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoO Solution..................................................................................... 492
10.4.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services............................................................................................. 492
10.4.1.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 492
10.4.1.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 493

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxx


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

10.4.1.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode..............................................................................................494


10.4.1.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode................................................................................................. 498
10.4.2 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (VLAN) Services............................................................................501
10.4.2.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 501
10.4.2.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 502
10.4.2.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode..............................................................................................503
10.4.2.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode................................................................................................. 508
10.4.3 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services..............................................................................513
10.4.3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 513
10.4.3.2 Service Signal Flow............................................................................................................................................514
10.4.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................515
10.4.4 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)................................................... 519
10.4.4.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 519
10.4.4.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 520
10.4.4.3 Process of Service Configuration in Single Mode..............................................................................................521
10.4.4.4 Process of Service Configuration in E2E Mode................................................................................................. 527
10.4.5 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)................................................ 530
10.4.5.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 531
10.4.5.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 532
10.4.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................532
10.4.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge)..............................................539
10.4.6.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 539
10.4.6.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 541
10.4.6.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................542
10.5 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoW Solution.................................................................................... 547
10.5.1 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services............................................................................................. 548
10.5.1.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 548
10.5.1.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 549
10.5.1.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................549
10.5.2 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (VLAN) Services............................................................................552
10.5.2.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 552
10.5.2.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 553
10.5.2.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................553
10.5.3 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services..............................................................................556
10.5.3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 557
10.5.3.2 Service Signal Flow............................................................................................................................................558
10.5.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................558
10.5.4 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)................................................... 561
10.5.4.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 561
10.5.4.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 562
10.5.4.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................563
10.5.5 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)................................................ 567

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

10.5.5.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 567


10.5.5.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 568
10.5.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................569
10.5.6 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1 ad Bridge)..............................................574
10.5.6.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 574
10.5.6.2 Service Signals Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 576
10.5.6.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................576
10.6 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the EoS Solution......................................................................................581
10.6.1 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board.................................................................................581
10.6.1.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 581
10.6.1.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 582
10.6.1.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................584
10.6.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services............................................................................................ 589
10.6.2.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 589
10.6.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 590
10.6.2.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................592
10.6.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services...................................................................................598
10.6.3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 598
10.6.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 599
10.6.3.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................601
10.6.4 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services......................................................................................................................606
10.6.4.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 607
10.6.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 607
10.6.4.3 Configuration Procedure.....................................................................................................................................609
10.6.5 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)........................................................................................... 614
10.6.5.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 614
10.6.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 615
10.6.5.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................617
10.6.6 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)........................................................................................ 624
10.6.6.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 624
10.6.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 625
10.6.6.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................629
10.6.7 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)...................................................................................... 637
10.6.7.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 638
10.6.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 639
10.6.7.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................642
10.6.8 Configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) Services and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)...................648
10.6.8.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................... 648
10.6.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation................................................................................................................. 649
10.6.8.3 Configuration Process.........................................................................................................................................652
10.7 Operation Tasks........................................................................................................................................................ 653
10.7.1 Configuring a Port on an Ethernet Board.............................................................................................................. 653

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

10.7.1.1 Configuring the External Port.............................................................................................................................653


10.7.1.2 Configuring the Internal Port..............................................................................................................................656
10.7.1.3 Modifying the QinQ Type Area..........................................................................................................................659
10.7.2 Configuring Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................................660
10.7.2.1 Creating EPL Services........................................................................................................................................660
10.7.2.2 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services........................................................................................................................ 662
10.7.2.3 Creating EPLAN Services.................................................................................................................................. 663
10.7.2.4 Creating a VLAN Group.................................................................................................................................... 666
10.7.2.5 Creating VLANs Filtering.................................................................................................................................. 668
10.7.3 Managing the MAC Address Table....................................................................................................................... 670
10.7.3.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry............................................................................................................... 671
10.7.3.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of a MAC Address................................................................................................... 673
10.7.3.3 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses............................................................................................. 674
10.7.3.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address............................................................................................... 676
10.7.3.5 Querying the Actual Capacity of a MAC Address Table................................................................................... 677
10.8 Parameters................................................................................................................................................................ 679
10.8.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Ports)....................................................................................................... 680
10.8.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Ports)........................................................................................................... 687
10.8.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Ports)................................................................................................690
10.8.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Ports).................................................................................................697
10.8.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.................................................................................................................................. 702
10.8.6 Parameters: Network Attributes............................................................................................................................ 710
10.8.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.........................................................................................................................714
10.8.8 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service........................................................................................................................717

11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).............................................................................. 723


11.1 Basic Concepts..........................................................................................................................................................724
11.1.1 Ethernet Service Types.......................................................................................................................................... 724
11.1.1.1 E-Line/E-LAN.................................................................................................................................................... 724
11.1.1.2 VPWS/VPLS...................................................................................................................................................... 728
11.1.2 Service Carrier Technologies.................................................................................................................................730
11.1.3 UNI/NNI................................................................................................................................................................ 731
11.1.4 Split Horizon Group...............................................................................................................................................732
11.2 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in E2E Mode......................................................................733
11.2.1 Services Supporting E2E Configuration................................................................................................................733
11.2.2 E2E Service Configuration Procedure...................................................................................................................734
11.2.3 Configuring the Basic Parameters of an MPLS Tunnel.........................................................................................735
11.2.3.1 Configuring the LSR ID for an NE.....................................................................................................................736
11.2.3.2 Configuring Global OAM Parameters................................................................................................................736
11.2.3.3 Allocating IP Addresses to Ports Automatically................................................................................................ 737
11.2.3.4 (Optional)Configuring NNI Port Attributes....................................................................................................... 738
11.2.3.5 Creating L2 Links............................................................................................................................................... 739
11.2.4 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel............................................................................................................................... 741

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

11.2.4.1 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel Without Tunnel APS................................................................................. 741


11.2.4.2 Configuring a single MPLS Tunnel with Tunnel APS....................................................................................... 748
11.2.4.3 Configuring Tunnels in Batches......................................................................................................................... 749
11.2.5 Configuring Service-Related Basic Parameters and Features............................................................................... 751
11.2.5.1 Configuring UNI Port Attributes........................................................................................................................ 751
11.2.5.2 (Optional) Configuring LAGs or MC-LAGs......................................................................................................753
11.2.6 Configuring a PWE3 Service.................................................................................................................................753
11.2.6.1 Configuring a PWE3 Service Without PW APS................................................................................................ 753
11.2.6.2 Configuring a PWE3 Service with PW APS...................................................................................................... 758
11.2.7 Configuring a VPLS Service................................................................................................................................. 759
11.2.8 Configuring a Composite Service (Method 1, Recommended).............................................................................763
11.2.8.1 Configuring a Composite Service Without PW APS......................................................................................... 763
11.2.8.2 Configuring a Composite Service with PW APS............................................................................................... 767
11.2.9 Configuring a Composite Service (Method 2).......................................................................................................768
11.2.10 (Optional) Configuring Other Ethernet Features................................................................................................. 777
11.3 Configuring an Ethernet Service on a Packet Network in Single Site Mode .......................................................... 777
11.3.1 Configuration Flow for the E-Line Services..........................................................................................................778
11.3.1.1 E-Line Services Carried by PWs........................................................................................................................ 778
11.3.1.2 E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links.............................................................................................................780
11.3.1.3 E-Line Services Carried by Ports........................................................................................................................783
11.3.1.4 Configuration Flow for the UNI-UNI E-Line Services...................................................................................... 786
11.3.2 Configuration Flow for the E-LAN Services.........................................................................................................788
11.3.2.1 E-LAN Services Carried by PWs ...................................................................................................................... 789
11.3.2.2 E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links ...........................................................................................................791
11.3.2.3 E-LAN Services Carried by Ports.......................................................................................................................794
11.3.3 Configuring an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................................................797
11.3.3.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................... 798
11.3.3.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................799
11.3.3.3 Setting the Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................800
11.3.3.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports.............................................................................................801
11.3.3.5 Configuring the Flow Control.............................................................................................................................802
11.3.4 Configuring the NNIs............................................................................................................................................ 803
11.3.4.1 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports........................................................................... 803
11.3.4.2 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by Static MPLS Tunnels................................................. 806
11.3.4.3 Configuring the NNIs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links.................................................................806
11.3.5 Configuring an MPLS Tunnel............................................................................................................................... 807
11.3.5.1 Configuring LSR ID........................................................................................................................................... 808
11.3.5.2 Configuring a Unidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis..............................................................809
11.3.5.3 Configuring a Bidirectional Static MPLS Tunnel on a Per-NE Basis................................................................ 811
11.3.6 Operation Tasks for Configuring E-Line Services................................................................................................ 812
11.3.6.1 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services..............................................................................................................812
11.3.6.2 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by Ports.................................................................................. 815

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

11.3.6.3 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis.....................................................818


11.3.6.4 Creating UNI-NNI E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links............................................................................. 821
11.3.7 Configuring E-LAN Services................................................................................................................................ 823
11.3.7.1 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports.................................................................................................. 823
11.3.7.2 Creating E-LAN Services Carried by PWs on a Per-NE Basis.......................................................................... 825
11.3.7.3 Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ Links....................................................................................... 827
11.3.8 Configuring Transit Nodes for Ethernet Services..................................................................................................829
11.3.8.1 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by Ports.......................................................................829
11.3.8.2 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by PWs....................................................................... 831
11.3.8.3 Configuring Transit NEs for Ethernet Services Carried by QinQ Links............................................................ 832
11.3.9 Configuring Address Resolution........................................................................................................................... 834
11.3.10 Configuring the NE-Level TPID......................................................................................................................... 835
11.3.11 Creating a QinQ Link...........................................................................................................................................836
11.3.12 Managing the Blacklist........................................................................................................................................ 836
11.4 Managing Services....................................................................................................................................................837
11.4.1 Managing MPLS Tunnels...................................................................................................................................... 838
11.4.1.1 Searching for MPLS Tunnels..............................................................................................................................838
11.4.1.2 Checking the MPLS Tunnel Topology............................................................................................................... 839
11.4.1.3 Duplicating MPLS Tunnels................................................................................................................................ 841
11.4.1.4 Deploying MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................................................................. 843
11.4.1.5 Modifying MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................................................................. 844
11.4.1.6 Deleting MPLS Tunnels..................................................................................................................................... 847
11.4.1.7 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels.....................................................................................................................849
11.4.2 Managing PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................................... 850
11.4.2.1 Searching for PWE3 Services.............................................................................................................................850
11.4.2.2 Checking the PWE3 Service Status.................................................................................................................... 851
11.4.2.3 Deploying PWE3 Services..................................................................................................................................854
11.4.2.4 Modifying PWE3 Services................................................................................................................................. 856
11.4.2.5 Deleting PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................................................858
11.4.2.6 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services....................................................................................................................860
11.4.3 Managing VPLS Services......................................................................................................................................863
11.4.3.1 Searching for VPLS Services............................................................................................................................. 863
11.4.3.2 Checking the VPLS Service Status.....................................................................................................................864
11.4.3.3 Deploying VPLS Services.................................................................................................................................. 867
11.4.3.4 Modifying VPLS Services.................................................................................................................................. 868
11.4.3.5 Deleting VPLS Services..................................................................................................................................... 872
11.4.3.6 Managing VSI Resources................................................................................................................................... 875
11.4.4 Managing Composite Services.............................................................................................................................. 877
11.4.4.1 Automatically Discovering Composite Services................................................................................................ 877
11.4.4.2 Checking the Composite Service Status............................................................................................................. 879
11.4.4.3 Deploying Composite Services...........................................................................................................................881
11.4.4.4 Modifying Composite Services.......................................................................................................................... 883

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

11.4.4.5 Deleting Composite Services..............................................................................................................................885


11.4.5 Searching for the Service Path...............................................................................................................................887
11.4.5.1 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs...................................................................................................887
11.4.5.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses.....................................................................................889
11.4.6 Performing Performance Monitoring Based on Service Paths.............................................................................. 891
11.4.7 Querying Service Trail Performance By PMS System..........................................................................................892
11.4.7.1 Searching for Service Paths Based on VLANs...................................................................................................892
11.4.7.2 Searching for Service Paths Based on MAC Addresses.....................................................................................894
11.5 Parameter Description...............................................................................................................................................896
11.5.1 Parameter Description: Attributes of Ethernet Interface....................................................................................... 896
11.5.1.1 General Attributes...............................................................................................................................................897
11.5.1.2 Flow Control....................................................................................................................................................... 907
11.5.1.3 Layer 2 Attributes............................................................................................................................................... 911
11.5.1.4 Layer 3 Attributes............................................................................................................................................... 916
11.5.1.5 Advanced Attributes........................................................................................................................................... 922
11.5.2 Parameter Description: MPLS............................................................................................................................... 931
11.5.2.1 Basic Configuration............................................................................................................................................ 931
11.5.2.2 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (on a Per-NE Basis)...................................................................... 932
11.5.2.3 Parameters for Configuring a Static Tunnel (End-to-End Mode).......................................................................937
11.5.3 Parameter Description: E-Line Service................................................................................................................. 942
11.5.3.1 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)......................................................................... 942
11.5.3.2 E-Line Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode)..................................................................... 948
11.5.3.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................959
11.5.3.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................960
11.5.3.5 Maintenance Association....................................................................................................................................963
11.5.3.6 MEP Point...........................................................................................................................................................964
11.5.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service................................................................................................................ 965
11.5.4.1 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)........................................................................ 965
11.5.4.2 E-LAN Service Parameters (Configuration in End-to-End Mode).................................................................... 967
11.5.4.3 UNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................975
11.5.4.4 NNI Parameters...................................................................................................................................................976
11.5.4.5 Split Horizon Group............................................................................................................................................979
11.5.4.6 MAC Address Learning Parameters................................................................................................................... 980
11.5.4.7 Unknown Frame Processing............................................................................................................................... 981
11.5.4.8 Static MAC Address........................................................................................................................................... 981
11.5.4.9 Maintenance Association....................................................................................................................................982
11.5.4.10 MEP Point.........................................................................................................................................................982
11.5.5 Parameter Description: QinQ Link........................................................................................................................ 983
11.5.6 Parameter Description: Address Parse...................................................................................................................983

12 Configuration Tasks............................................................................................................... 985


12.1 Configuring the Working Mode................................................................................................................................987
12.2 Configuring the Service Mode................................................................................................................................. 988

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide Contents

12.3 Configuring the Service Type...................................................................................................................................990


12.4 Creating Cross-Connections..................................................................................................................................... 991
12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots................................................................................................................................. 995
12.6 Configuring the Board Mode....................................................................................................................................996
12.7 Configuring the J0 Byte............................................................................................................................................997
12.8 Configuring the Line Rate........................................................................................................................................ 999
12.9 Modifying the Configuration Data......................................................................................................................... 1001
12.9.1 Modifying Port.................................................................................................................................................... 1001
12.9.2 Modifying the Services Configuration................................................................................................................ 1004
12.9.2.1 Deactivating Cross-Connection Service........................................................................................................... 1004
12.9.2.2 Deleting Cross-Connections............................................................................................................................. 1006

A Parameters Description......................................................................................................... 1008


A.1 Enable Port ..............................................................................................................................................................1010
A.2 Port (Ethernet Port Attribute) ................................................................................................................................. 1010
A.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold................................................................................................................ 1011
A.4 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .................................................................................................................1013
A.5 Default VLAN ID.................................................................................................................................................... 1013
A.6 VLAN Priority ........................................................................................................................................................ 1014
A.7 Entry Detection ....................................................................................................................................................... 1014
A.8 Tag Identifier............................................................................................................................................................1015
A.9 Source Channel (WDM Cross-Connection)............................................................................................................ 1016
A.10 Sink Channel (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)...................................................................................... 1017
A.11 Activation Status (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration).................................................................................1018
A.12 Level (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)................................................................................................... 1019
A.13 Direction (WDM Cross-Connection Configuration)............................................................................................. 1021
A.14 Service Timeslot (WDM Services)........................................................................................................................1021
A.15 Service Mode (WDM Interface)............................................................................................................................ 1023
A.16 Board Mode (WDM Interface).............................................................................................................................. 1024
A.17 Explicit Link.......................................................................................................................................................... 1026
A.18 Explicit Node......................................................................................................................................................... 1027
A.19 Excluded Node.......................................................................................................................................................1028
A.20 Auto-Calculation....................................................................................................................................................1029
A.21 Copy after Creation................................................................................................................................................1029
A.22 Level (WDM Trail Creation)................................................................................................................................. 1030
A.23 Direction (WDM Trail Creation)........................................................................................................................... 1031
A.24 Rate (WDM Trail Creation)...................................................................................................................................1032
A.25 Source (WDM Trail Creation)............................................................................................................................... 1033
A.26 Sink (WDM Trail Creation)...................................................................................................................................1034

B Glossary.................................................................................................................................... 1036

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to
Configuration Guide This Manual

1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by


Referring to This Manual

This manual describes how to configure services on the NMS and other NMS operations
involved in service configuration. This section provides guidelines to use this manual and
obtain reference information.

l See Table 1-1 to obtain the service configuration guidelines.


l See Table 1-2 to obtain reference information, such as NMS configurations, NE and
network configurations, and feature configurations.

Table 1-1 Guidelines for Service Configuration

To... Then...

Configure WDM Select the Manually by Station, by Station Service Package,


services or by Trail mode to configure WDM services as required.
For boards that support multiple application scenarios,
guidelines are provided for configuring services manually by
station in each application scenario. For details, see:
l 3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by
Station)
l 3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)
l 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by
Station)
l 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)
For universal line boards, see 6 Configuring Universal Line
Boards.

Configuring SDH For details, see 9 Configuring the SDH Services.


Services

Configure Ethernet l For EoO/EoW/EoS, see 10 Configuring Ethernet


services Services(EoO/EoW/EoS).
l For Packet, see 11 Configuring Ethernet Services (Packet).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to
Configuration Guide This Manual

NOTE

l To configure services with ODUk SNCP protection, see ODUk SNCP Protection in the Feature
Description.
l To configure PID boards, see "PID" in the Feature Description.

Table 1-2 Guidelines for Reference Information


To... Then...

Quickly understand See the Commissioning Guide:


NMS operations l Connecting the NMS Computer
Connecting the U2000 Server Directly
Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN
l U2000 Quick Guide
Logging In to the U2000 Client
Exiting a U2000 Client
l Web LCT Quick Guide
Installing the Web LCT
Connecting the Web LCT to NEs
Logging In to the Web LCT
Shutting Down the Web LCT
l Entering the Common Views
Opening the Main Topology on the U2000
NE List on the Web LCT
Opening the NE Explorer
Opening the NE Panel
l Using Online Help

Configure NEs and See Configuring NE and Network in the Commissioning Guide.
networks Configure each functional part of a network according to the
network creation process so that services can be created on the
network topology.

Monitor performance See Performance Management in the Commissioning Guide to


using the NMS query and set performance monitoring.

Understand detailed See the description of each board in the Hardware Description:
information about l Physical and Logical Ports: Describes physical ports
boards displayed on the NMS and logical ports of each board.
l Configuration of Cross-connection: Describes cross-
connection configurations of each board.
l Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS: Describes
parameters that can be set or queried on the NMS for each
board, default values of the parameters, and parameter
configuration principles.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 1 Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to
Configuration Guide This Manual

To... Then...

Complete optical-layer See Configuring Wavelength Grooming in the Commissioning


configurations or Guide. Complete wavelength grooming by referring to
service grooming Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow.

Configure features See the Feature Description to understand features, such as:
l Optical Line Protection
l Intra-Board 1+1 Protection
l IPA
l Synchronization
l OTN Overheads Technology
l Master-Slave Subrack Management
To understand more features, see Feature at a Glance in the
Feature Description.

Back up NE data See Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board, Manually
Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card, and Backing Up
Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client in the
Commissioning Guide.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by


Station)

About This Chapter

When manually configuring WDM services by station, you need to perform various
operations such as configuring board service types and creating cross-connections.
Configuring WDM services in this mode involves multiple NMS GUIs and the configuration
process is complex. However, the mode is applicable to various scenarios and very flexible.

2.1 Basic Concepts


The basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-
connections, WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps
you successfully configure services.
2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow
This section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuring
WDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs
according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure the 10GE LAN services by using the LDX board,
which is a type of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.
2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.
2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and Line Boards
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.
2.6 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX and NS2 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2
boards.
2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and NS3 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services through TN52TQX boards and
cross-connect ODU2 or ODU2e signals to TN54NS3 boards in one station. The other station
is configured exactly the same.
2.8 Parameters

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.1 Basic Concepts


The basic concepts involved in WDM service configuration include electrical cross-
connections, WDM service types, and board models. Understanding the basic concepts helps
you successfully configure services.

2.1.1 General Principles for Configuring Electrical Cross-


Connections
Electrical cross-connections include inter-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections
between boards) and intra-board cross-connections (namely, cross-connections inside a
board). This topic describes the concepts, port types, configuration principles, and
applications of the two types of electrical cross-connections.

2.1.1.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections


This topic describes the concept, port types, configuration principles, and two applications of
inter-board electrical cross-connections. In addition, this topic provides an example of
configuring inter-board electrical cross-connections using the U2000.

Basic Concept
Inter-board electrical cross-connections are configured between boards to groom ODUk and
GE services inside a subrack. They are configured on the U2000.
Specifically, inter-board electrical cross-connections can be configured either between OTN
tributary and line boards (include PID boards) or between line boards (include PID boards).
The line boards include OTN line boards, universal line boards.
Some OTU boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support inter-board 10GE
and GE cross-connections. For details, see section "Physical and Logical Ports".

Port Type
The source and sink ports must be specified when you configure inter-board cross-
connections. On the U2000, the following ports can be configured as the source or sink ports
of cross-connections:
l ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port
number and -1 indicates the channel number.
l ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port
number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example, RX2/
TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in
standard mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. The service
mapping paths are different in the following ODU timeslot configuration modes: Assign
consecutive and Assign random.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

In the Assign consecutive mode, level-by-level service mapping is performed from


lower rates to higher rates, for example, ODU0->ODU1->ODU2. In this example,
the logical port is represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1,
which means the first ODU0 in the second ODU1 of the first ODU2 on optical port
1.
In the Assign random mode, cross-level service mapping is performed from a low
rate to a high rate, for example, ODU0->ODU2. In this example, the logical port is
represented as 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1, which means the first
ODU0 in the second ODU2 on optical port 1.

Configuration Principles
The source and sink ports of a cross-connection must have the same ODUk service
granularity and line rate (standard mode/speedup mode ), but they do not require the same
board working mode (standard/compatible) or ODUk timeslot configuration mode (assign
random/assign consecutive). The following figure shows ODU0-level cross-connections. In
the figure, each of the boards can work in either standard or compatible mode.
l As for the same ODUk service granularity, tributary boards (standard/compatible) can
interconnect with line boards (standard/compatible), and the cross-connections between
the boards are indicated by 1 2 3 4 in the figure.
l As for the same ODUk service granularity and line rate, line boards (standard/
compatible) can interconnect with each other, and the cross-connection between the
boards is indicated by 5 in the figure.

OTN tributary board


OTN line board(standard mode)
(compatible mode)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

OTN tributary board OTN line board(compatible mode)


(standard mode)
5
3(TX1/RX1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1
4 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1

NOTE

l On the U2000, the subrack layout diagram displays different names of the board in different modes
(standard and compatible). For example, the name of the TN52ND2 board in standard mode is
displayed as TN52ND2(STND), and the name of the TN52ND2 board in compatible mode is
displayed as TN52ND2. For the board names in different modes, see 2.1.2 Standard Mode and
Compatible Mode.
l Line Rate is a parameter available only to line boards and can be set using the U2000. For the
parameter setting of boards, see the "Parameters Can Be Set and Queried on the NMS" topic for the
boards.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Applications
l Adding/Dropping of Client-Side Services on the WDM Side
The cross-connect board cross-connects the ODUk services between OTN tributary
boards and line boards/PID boards/universal line boards.
Figure 2-1 illustrates how adding/dropping client-side services is achieved on the WDM
side using the ODU0 cross-connections between the TOA board (standard mode) and the
ND2 board (standard mode).

Figure 2-1 Adding/dropping of client-side services on the WDM side at sites A and C
Adding/dropping Client side WDM side
of client services
on the WDM side OTN tributary ODU0 OTN line
A board board

GE
OTN
Client service ODU0
network -> ODU0 Cross-connect -> OTU2
board

GE
TOA standard mode ND2 standard mode
B C 3(TX1/RX1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Local service 4(TX2/RX2)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
Adding/dropping
pass-through on of client services 5(TX3/RX3)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3
the WDM side on the WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Signal flow 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Cross-connections, which must be configured on the NMS

l Local service pass-through on the WDM side


The cross-connect board cross-connects the ODUk services between OTN line boards or
universal line boards.
When a PID network interconnects with a non-PID network, only centralized electrical
cross-connections are supported. For the tangent node between the two networks, cross-
connections must be configured between the PID and OTN/universal line boards so that
the ODUk services can be sent from the PID network to the non-PID network.
Figure 2-2 illustrates how pass-through of a local service is achieved on the WDM side
in a non-PID network using the ODU0 cross-connections between the ND2 (standard)
and ND2 (compatible) boards.
Figure 2-3 illustrates how pass-through of a local service is achieved on the WDM side
from the PID network to the non-PID network.

Figure 2-2 Local service pass-through on the WDM side at site B (non-PID network)
Adding/dropping WDM side WDM side
of client services
on the WDM side OTN line ODU0 OTN line
A
board board
GE
OTN
OTU2 ODU0
network ->ODU0 ->OTU2
Cross-connect
board

GE

B C ND2 compatible mode ND2 standard mode


Local service 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Adding/dropping 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
pass-through on of client services 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
the WDM side on the WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3

168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
Signal flow 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Cross-connections, which must be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-3 Local service pass-through on the WDM side (interconnection of PID
network and non-PID network)
PID network Non-PID network
- WDM side - WDM side
PID board OTN line
Non-PID ODU1 board
network
Tangent NE:
The PID and
OTN/universal OTU2 ODU1
line boards ->ODU1 Cross-connect ->OTU2
reside in the board
same subrack.

NPO2 standard mode ND2 standard mode


1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
PID
network 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Signal flow between a PID network and
a non-PID network 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Note: A PID network is a network that has
PID boards deployed, while a non-PID
network has no PID boards deployed. Cross-connections, which must be configured on the U2000

Configuring Cross-Connections on the U2000


Figure 2-4 shows the U2000 GUI for configuring cross-connections on the U2000. In the

figure, ports enclosed in are the source and sink ports of the cross-connection.
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the
navigation tree.
2. Click the WDM Cross-Connection Configuration tab and click Create. Then the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.

Figure 2-4 GUI for configuring cross-connections (using the ODU0 cross-connection
between TOA and ND2 boards as an example)
TOA Compatible mode
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connection level: ODU0


ND2 Standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:3

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1

2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTE
Direction shown in the figure can be set to Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
l Unidirectional creates unidirectional cross-connections from the source optical port to the sink
optical port. Signals can be transmitted only in one direction at the same time, such as only sending
or receiving signals.
l Bidirectional creates bidirectional cross-connections from the source optical port to the sink optical
port and from the sink optical port to the source optical port. Signals can be transmitted in both
directions at the same time.

2.1.1.2 Intra-board Electrical Cross-Connections


This topic describes the concept and port types of intra-board electrical cross-connections.
This topic provides a schematic diagram of intra-board cross-connections.

Basic Concept
Intra-board electrical cross-connections are used to flexibly groom services inside a board and
they can be configured using the U2000. For example, to converge multiple services into one
ODU1 signal, intra-board cross-connections must be created to groom the services into an
ODU1 signal.

Port Type
The source and sink ports must be specified when you configure intra-board cross-
connections. On the NMS, the following ports can be configured as the source or sink ports of
cross-connections:
l ClientLP-n: the logical client-side port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) indicates the port
number and -1 indicates the channel number.
l ODUkLP-n: the logical ODUk port of a board in compatible mode, for example,
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) indicates the port
number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l RX/TX-n: the logical client-side port of a board in standard mode, for example, RX2/
TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 indicates the port number and -2 indicates the channel number.
l n(INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: the ODUk-level logical port of a board in
standard mode, from which you can learn the service mapping path. For example, 1(IN1/
OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 indicates the first ODU1 signal in the first ODU2
signal on optical port 1.

Schematic Diagram
Figure 2-5 illustrates intra-board cross-connections using the TOA board as an example.
Services from client-side ports 3(TX1/RX1)-1 to 5(TX3/RX3)-1 are cross-connected to port
201ClientLP. In this way, the three client-side Any-rate services are converged into one
ODU1 signal. The TOA board can converge a maximum of eight client-side Any-rate services
into one ODU1 signal.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-5 Schematic diagram of intra-board cross-connection (multiple Any-rate services


into one ODU1 signal)

Any ODU1
Multiple Any-rate cross- convergence
connections in a board are Any ODU1
groomed to the multiple Any
channels of one ODU1 port.
Backplane
Client side side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3

5(TX3/RX3)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
6(TX4/RX4)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
8(TX6/RX6)-1

9(TX7/RX7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1


208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8
Cross-connect Multiplex module
module

Cross-connections inside a board, which must be configured on the NMS


Virtual channels, which do not need to be configured on the NMS

Intra-board cross-connections are configured on the U2000 in the same way as inter-board
cross-connections. For details, see 2.1.1.1 Inter-board Electrical Cross-Connections.

2.1.2 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode


Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new
models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the
existing board models are marked as compatible mode. For boards in standard mode, only
channels or physical ports are presented in the models and NMS, with service mapping paths
displayed for the channels or physical ports. All ODU layers are allocated to the physical
ports. When configuring cross-connections, users do not need to know the internal ports on
the boards. Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode makes operations easier
and has fewer end-to-end trail layers, reducing maintenance costs.

Boards Supporting the Standard Mode


Table 2-1 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards on the NMS.

Table 2-1 Board names displayed on the NMS

Name of Board in Name of Board in Board Name (Displayed


Standard Mode Compatible Mode in the NE Panel)
(Displayed Only When (Displayed Only When
the Logical Board Is the Logical Board Is
Added) Added)

53TDX(STND) 53TDX 53TDX

54THA(STND) 54THA 54THA

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Name of Board in Name of Board in Board Name (Displayed


Standard Mode Compatible Mode in the NE Panel)
(Displayed Only When (Displayed Only When
the Logical Board Is the Logical Board Is
Added) Added)

54TOA(STND) 54TOA 54TOA

55TOX - 55TOX

55TQX(STND) 55TQX 55TQX

54TSC - 54TSC

54TSXL - 54TSXL

54TTX - 54TTX

52ND2(STND) 52ND2 52ND2

53ND2 53ND2(COMP) 53ND2

55NO2 - 55NO2

53NQ2 53NQ2(COMP) 53NQ2

52NS2(STND) 52NS2 52NS2

53NS2 53NS2(COMP) 53NS2

54NS3(STND) 54NS3 54NS3

55NS3 - 55NS3

56NS3 - 56NS3

54NS4 - 54NS4

56NS4 - 56NS4

57NS4 - 57NS4

58NS4 - 58NS4

54NS4M - 54NS4M

54HUNQ2 - 54HUNQ2

54HUNS3 - 54HUNS3

54ENQ2(STND) 54ENQ2 54ENQ2

55NPO2(STND) 55NPO2 55NPO2

55NPO2E - 55NPO2E

The hyphen (-) indicates that the compatible mode is not supported.

When electrical-layer ASON is deployed, there are the following restrictions:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

l Boards in standard mode cannot connect with those in compatible mode on the WDM
side. They can be interconnect only on the backplane side.
l If electrical-layer ASON services need to traverse boards in standard mode, the version
of the source NE must be V100R006C01 or later.

The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to introduces the standard and
compatible modes of a line board.

Standard Mode
Figure 2-6 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode.

Figure 2-6 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1

ODU2:1 OCh:1
2XODUflex ODUflex:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1
OCh :1

1 xODU2/
1xODU 2e

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
Other tributary/line/PID board

ODU1:1

ODU2:1 OCh : 1
4 xODU1
ODU1:4 IN/OUT

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU2:1 OCh :1
8 xODU0 ODU 0:1
ODU 1:4
ODU 0:2

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
ODU0:1

ODU2:1 OCh :1
8 xODU0
ODU0: 8

Backplane

Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path

Multiplexing module ODU2 mapping path

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Service processing module ODUflex mapping path

ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 Cross-connection that must be configured on


>ODU1>ODU2) the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0>ODU2)

Table 2-2 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board


Port Name Meaning

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the


(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0: Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the


(1-8) backplane (ODU0->ODU2)

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1: Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the


(1-4) backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1 Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from


the backplane

IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1- Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the


ODUflex:(1-2) backplane

IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports

Compatible Mode
Figure 2-7 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode.

Figure 2-7 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode


Other tributary/ Other tributary/ Other tributary/
line/PID board line/PID board line/PID board

8 x ODU0 4 x ODU1 1 x ODU2/ODU2e Backplane

161
51
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
164
ODU2
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51
164 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Cross-connect ODU1 mapping path


module

Multiplexing ODU2 mapping path


module

Service Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to


processing be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0
module signals are required, users only need to configure
cross-connections from other boards to the
ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The
board's internal structure enables transmission of the
multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do
not need to configure a cross-connection for
transmitting the multiplexed signal.
ODU0 mapping Cross-connection that must be configured on the
path NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards

Table 2-3 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board


Port Name Description Automatic Cross-Connection

ODU0LP1- Internal logical ports of the board. Automatic cross-connections are


ODU0LP4 Each of the ports provides optical established between these ports and
channels 1 and 2. the ODU1LP port.

ODU1LP1 Internal logical ports. Each of the Automatic cross-connections are


port provides optical channels 1, 2, established between these ports and
3, and 4. the ODU2LP port

ODU2LP1 Internal logical ports of the board. Automatic cross-connections are


Each of the ports provides optical established between these ports and
channel 1. the IN/OUT port

IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports. -

Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of
the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.

Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes


Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 2-4 uses the
TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-4 GUIs on the NMS


GUI on the Navigation Path Compatible Standard Mode
NMS Mode

Path View In the NE panel, select a See Figure 2-8. See Figure 2-9.
board, double-click the board
icon or right-click and
choose Path View from the
shortcut menu.

WDM In the NE Explorer, select the See Figure 2-10. See Figure 2-11.
Interface required board and choose
Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function
Tree. tab.

Create Cross- In the NE Explorer, select the See Figure 2-12. See Figure 2-13.
Connection required NE and choose
Service Configuration > WDM
Service Management from
the Function Tree.

Figure 2-8 Path View (compatible mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-9 Path View (standard mode)

Figure 2-10 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-11 WDM Interface (standard mode)

Figure 2-12 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-13 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)

2.1.3 ODUflex
Starting from V100R006C01, the equipment supports the ODUflex (ODUk with variable
bandwidth) technology, which enables users to flexibly configure the container capacity based
on service sizes, leveraging line bandwidth.

Applicable Boards
Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex that is applicable to the following boards:
l Tributary boards: TN53TDX, TN57TDX, TN55TQX, TN57TQX, TN54TOA,
TN57TOA, and TEM28
l Line boards: TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN57ND2, TN52NS2, TN53NS2, TN53NQ2,
TN57NQ2, TN54NS4, TN54HUNS3, TN54HUNQ2, TN56NS3
l Tributary-line integrated board: LOA

NOTE

l The TN11LOA board supports ODUflex only when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to
Assign random.
l The TN52ND2, TN53ND2, TN57ND2, TN53NQ2, TN57NQ2, TN52NS2, and TN53NS2 boards
support ODUflex only when they work in Standard Mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode is set to Assign random.

ODUflex Involved Operations


The following describes the GUIs for creating services involving ODUflex on the NMS and
the navigation paths.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-5 GUIs and navigation paths


GUI on the NMS Description Navigation Path

WDM Interface When the board where you want to In the NE Explorer, select the
create services is a line board or the required board and choose
LOA board and the services need to Configuration > WDM
be encapsulated into ODUflex Interface > Advanced
services, set ODU Timeslot Attributes from the Function
Configuration Mode to Assign Tree.
random.

Create Cross- When Level is set to ODUflex, you In the NE Explorer, select the
Connection Service must set Service Type. required NE and choose
Configuration > WDM
Service Management from
the Function Tree. In the
displayed window, click
New.

NOTE

l The value of Occupied ODUTUk Timeslots is in the range of 1 to 8 for the TEM28 board and 3 to
7 for other boards, which indicates that the service rate supported by ODUflex is in the range of 1.25
Gbit/s (1 x 1.25 Gbit/s) to 10 Gbit/s (8 x 1.25 Gbit/s).
l The rule for calculating the value of Occupied ODUTUk Timeslots is as follows: Value = Service
rate mapping the service type configured at a port/Bandwidth of each TS subtimeslot (1.25 Gbit/s).
If the value is not an integer, the value is the quotient plus 1. For example, if an FC400 service is
received, the value of Occupied ODUTUk Timeslots is 4 (4.25 Gbit/s/1.25 Gbit/s = 3.4, 3 + 1 = 4).

ODUflex Configuration Procedure


Figure 2-14 shows the ODUflex configuration flowchart.

Figure 2-14 ODUflex configuration flowchart

Configure the port


1 working mode

Configure the
2 timeslot
configuration mode

3 Configure the
service type

(Optional)
4 Configure ODUflex
Tolerance

Configure cross-
5 connections

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-6 describes the ODUflex configuration procedure.

Table 2-6 Configuration procedure


No. Action Involved Board Description

1 Configure Tributary board or l Parameter settings: Set Port Working


the port tributary-line Mode to ODUflex non-convergence
working integrated board mode.
mode. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,
select the required board and choose
Configuration > Working Mode from
the Function Tree. In the displayed
window.

2 Configure Line board or l Parameter settings: Set ODU Timeslot


the timeslot tributary-line Configuration Mode to Assign random
configuration integrated board for the required ports.
mode. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,
select the required board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function
Tree.

3 Configure Tributary board or l Parameter settings: Set the service type


the service tributary-line based on the service plan.
type. integrated board l Operation description: Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.

4 (Optional) Line board or l Parameter settings: Specifies the tolerance


Configure tributary-line of deviation between the actual client-side
ODUflex integrated board service rate and the specified rate when
tolerance the client-side service type is ODUflex.
This parameter is reserved and optional in
configuring the services currently
supported.
When the tributary board receives 3GSDI/
3GSDIRBR services from client
equipment, set this parameter to 10. If the
tributary board receives other services, set
it to 100.
l Operation description: Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function
Tree.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. Action Involved Board Description

5 Configure l Tributary l Parameter settings:


cross- board or line Set Level to ODUflex and select the
connections. board: inter- source slot, sink slot, source optical
board cross- port, sink optical port, source optical
connections channel, and sink optical channel.
between
tributary and Set Service Type to the actual client-
line boards side signals.

l Tributary-line l Operation description: In the NE Explorer,


integrated select the required NE and choose
board: cross- Configuration > WDM Service
connections Management from the Function Tree. In
from LP ports the displayed window, click New.
to the WDM
side

2.2 WDM Service Configuration Flow


This section describes the configuration process of boards and services. Before configuring
WDM services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic configuration of NEs
according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
WDM service configuration flow refer to Table 2-7.

Table 2-7 WDM Service Configuration Flow


No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task
Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

1 - Configuring the Configuring the Optional


Board Mode Board Mode

2 - Configuring the Configuring the Optional


Service Mode Service Mode

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task


Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

3 Configuring the Configuring the Configuring the Mandatory


Service Type Service Type Service Type The type of client-
side services on
boards needs to be
set according to the
type of services
transmitted over
the network.
Different boards
access different
types of services.
For details, see the
client-side
specifications of
the OTU board and
tributary board in
the Hardware
Description.

4 12.7 Configuring 12.7 Configuring 12.7 Configuring Optional


the J0 Byte the J0 Byte the J0 Byte When the service
type is SDH or
SONET service,
you must set the J0
byte.

5 - - Configuring the Optional


Line Rate l When ODU2e
or ODU3e
signals are
cross-connected
to the line
board, you need
to set Line
Rate to
Speedup Mode
for the line
board.
l In other
scenarios, you
need to set
Line Rate to
Standard
Mode for the
line board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task


Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

6 - Creating cross- Creating cross- Optional


connect services connect services There is no need to
(intra-board) (intra-board) configure cross-
connections for the
OTU board
without grooming
functions. Cross-
connections must
be configured for
tributary boards
and other OTU
boards. For details
on how to choose
ports of a board for
cross-connections,
see service
configuration
descriptions of the
board in the
Hardware
Description.

7 - - Creating cross- Optional


connect services When tributary
(inter-board) boards work with
line boards, the
inter-board cross-
connections must
be configured. For
details on how to
choose ports of a
board for cross-
connections, see
service
configuration
descriptions of the
board in the
Hardware
Description.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

No. OTU Boards OTU Boards Line Boards and Task


Without With Grooming Tributary Boards Description
Grooming Functions
Functions

8 12.5 Configuring 12.5 Configuring 12.5 Configuring Optional


Service Service Service Timeslots When the timeslot
Timeslots Timeslots configuration
mode is set to
manual, Send
Timeslots and
Receive Timeslots
need to be set for
certain boards.

9 - Creating WDM Creating WDM Optional


trails by using trails by using the Create WDM trails
the trail search trail search by using the trail
function function search function
and check whether
service
configurations are
correct. If the end-
to-end services on
the client side are
correctly
configured, the
client trails of the
corresponding
level can be
searched out.

Confi 2.3 Configuring 2.4 Configuring 2.5 Configuring -


gurati WDM Services WDM Services WDM Services
on for OTU Boards for OTU Boards for Tributary
Exam Without Cross- with Cross- Boards and Line
ple Connect Connect Boards is
Capability is Capability is provided.
provided. provided.

2.3 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards Without


Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure the 10GE LAN services by using the LDX board,
which is a type of OTU board that does not require cross-connection configuration.

2.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service on a ring network.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Service Requirement
See Figure 2-15. Optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs
function as OADM stations.
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional 10GE LAN service is
available between station A and station B. At station A, the LDX board accesses one 10GE
LAN service. At station B, the LDX board accesses one 10GE LAN service.

Figure 2-15 Configuration networking diagram of the 10GE LAN service


User1

East 12LDX

East West NMS

West 12LDX West A East


B D

West
C
User2 East

:OADM
West East

Board Configuration Information


In this example, a 12LDX board must be configured at station A and station B.

2.3.2 Service Signal Flow


This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a 10GE
LAN service.
There is one bidirectional 10GE LAN service between stations A and B.

NOTE

You do not need to configure cross-connections on the LDX board.

2.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional 10GE LAN service at stations A and
B.

Prerequisite
Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be
searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.)
Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LDX boards at stations A and B to
10GETH. For details, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDX board at station A.
For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.
Step 3 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LDX board at station B.
For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Verifying Configurations
Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side
are correctly configured, the client trails of 10GE LAN levels can be searched out. For details,
see Searching for WDM Trails.

2.4 Configuring WDM Services for OTU Boards with


Cross-Connect Capability
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the LQMS board.

2.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network.

Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 2-16, ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs function as OADM stations. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available
between station A and station B.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Figure 2-16 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service


User1

East 12LQMS

East West NMS

West 12LQMS West A East


B D
West
C
User2 East

:OADM
West East

Board Configuration Information


In this example, two 12LQMS boards must be configured at each station.

2.4.2 Service Signal Flow


This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE
service.

One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B.

Figure 2-17 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B.

Figure 2-17 Unidirectional service at each station


Client side WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Service
Cross-connect WDM-side
processing
module optical module
module

NOTE

ClientLP is a logical port. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and ClientLP ports need
to be configured. There are connections between ClientLP ports and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and
therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

Prerequisite
Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be
searched out. For details, see 8.6 Searching for WDM Trails.)

Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found. .

You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
If the capacity of the configured services is greater than the available cross-connection
capacity, the service configuration fails.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Set Board Mode of the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to LQM Mode. For details,
see Configuring the Board Mode.
NOTE

After Board Mode is set to LQM Mode, the TN12LQMS board can serve as a tributary and line board and
convert four Any services into one OTU1 service.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to
Client Mode. For details, see Configuring the Service Mode.
NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12LQMS board can access services other than OTN
services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12LQMS boards at stations A and B to
GE. For details, see Configuring the Service Type.

Step 4 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station A.


1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the LQMS board to the ClientLP port.
For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.4.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 6 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station
A. For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Step 7 Configure the service to be added or dropped at station B.


1. Configure a GE service from the ClientLP port of the LQMS board to the RX/TX port.
For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12LQMS

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.4.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 9 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12LQMS board at station
B. For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service
Timeslots.

----End

Verifying Configurations
Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side
are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see
Searching for Trails.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.5 Configuring WDM Services for Tributary Boards and


Line Boards
This section describes how to configure GE services by using the TQM and NQ2 boards.

2.5.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a GE service on a ring network.

Service Requirement
See Figure 2-18. ONEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs function as
OADM stations.

User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional GE service is available
between station A and station B. At station A, the TN12TQM board accesses one GE service
and multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that is, one
ODU1 service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is multiplexed
with other services into one OTU2 service. At station B, the TN12TQM board accesses one
GE service and multiplexes the GE service into one channel of ODU1 electrical signals, that
is, one ODU1 service. Then, the ODU1 service is sent to the TN52NQ2 board and is
multiplexed with other services into one OTU2 service.

Figure 2-18 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service


User1
East 12TQM
East 52NQ2

East West NMS

West A East

B D

C West
User2 East
West 12TQM
West 52NQ2
:OADM
West East

Board Configuration Information


In this example, a 12TQM board and a 52NQ2 board must be configured at station A and
station B.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.5.2 Service Signal Flow


This section describes how to configure the transparent transmission signal flow of a GE
service.
One bidirectional GE service is available between station A and station B.
Figure 2-19 shows the service signal flow between station A and station B.

Figure 2-19 Unidirectional service at each station


TQM NQ2
Client side WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 1(IN/OUT)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Fixed cross- Servive processing
connection module

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU1LP are logical ports. Cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports and
ClientLP ports need to be configured. ODU1 cross-connections between the ClientLP ports of the TQM
board and the ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board need to be configured. There are connections between
the ODU1LP ports of the NQ2 board and WDM-side IN/OUT ports, and therefore cross-connections do
not need to be configured.

2.5.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional GE service at stations A and B.

Prerequisite
Fibers are connected correctly according to the network structure. (Namely, OCh trails can be
searched out. For details, see Searching for WDM Trails.)
Check parameters of the OTU board and ensure that no error is found.
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to
Client Mode. For details, see Configuring the Service Mode.
NOTE

After Service Mode is set to Client Mode, the TN12TQM board can access services other than OTN
services.

Step 2 Set Service Mode of the client-side ports on the TN52NQ2 boards at stations A and B to
ODU1. For details, see Configuring the Service Mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTE

After Service Mode is set to ODU1, the TN52NQ2 board can access ODU1 services.

Step 3 Set Service Type of the client-side ports on the TN12TQM boards at stations A and B to GE.
For details, see Configuring the Service Type.
Step 4 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from
the TN12TQM board at station A.
1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP
port. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.
The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 6 Configure ODU1 services between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board at station
A.
1. Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the
ODU1LP port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.
The following table lists the values of the parameters for station A.

Field Value

Level ODU1
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2

Sink Optical Port 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 7 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 8 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at station A.
For details on how to configure service timeslots, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Step 9 Configure the internal cross-connections for the wavelengths that are added or dropped from
the TN12TQM board at station B.
1. Configure a GE service from the RX/TX port of the TN12TQM board to the ClientLP
port. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.
The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

Level GE
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 3(RX1/TX1)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Sink Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Optical
Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It is
not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service Signal
Flow.

Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 11 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52NQ2 board and the TN12TQM board
at station B.
1. Configure an ODU1 service from the ClientLP port of the TN12TQM board to the
ODU1LP port of the TN52NQ2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

The following table lists the values of the parameters for station B.

Field Value

Level ODU1
NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Service
Level.

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-12TQM

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Port.

Source Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Source
Optical Path.

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NQ2

Sink Optical Port 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink Port.

Sink Optical Channel 1


NOTE
On the Web LCT, this parameter is Sink
Optical Path.

Activate Immediately Active


NOTE
This parameter is valid only on the U2000. It
is not applicable to the Web LCT.

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.5.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 12 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

Step 13 Optional: Configure service timeslots of the logical port of the TN12TQM board at NE B.
For details, see 12.5 Configuring Service Timeslots.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Verifying Configurations
Check whether service configurations are correct. If the end-to-end services on the client side
are correctly configured, the client trails of GE levels can be searched out. For details, see
Searching for WDM Trails.

2.6 Configuring 10GE LAN Services by Using the TDX


and NS2 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services by using the TDX and NS2
boards.

2.6.1 Configuration Networking Diagram


This section describes how to configure a 10GE LAN service on a ring network.

Service Requirement
See Figure 2-20. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the ONEs
function as OADM stations.
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional 10GE LAN service is
available between station A and station C. At station A, the TN52TDX board accesses one
10GE LAN service and encapsulates the 10GE LAN service into one channel of ODU2
electrical signals, that is, one ODU2 service. The TN52NS2 board accesses the ODU2 service
and then outputs one OTU2 service. Station B transparently transmits the OTU2 service. At
station C, the TN52NS2 board accesses the OTU2 service and converts the OTU2 service into
ODU2 electrical signals, which are groomed to the TN52TDX board and then output as one
10GE LAN service.

Figure 2-20 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service


User1
East 52TDX
East 52NS2

East West NMS

East 52NS2
West 52NS2
West A East

B D

East West
C

West East
:OADM
West 52TDX
West 52NS2
:REG
User2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Board Configuration Information


In this example, the TN52TDX board and TN52NS2 boards must be configured at stations A
and C. Two TN52NS2 boards must be configured at station B.

2.6.2 Service Signal Flow


This topic describes how to configure the transmission signal flow of a 10GE LAN service.
One bidirectional GE service is available among stations A, B, and C.
Figure 2-21 shows the service signal flow among stations A, B, and C.

Figure 2-21 Service at each station

TDX backplane backplane NS2 WDM side


side side
201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 71(ODU2LP/
3(RX1/TX1)-1
A ODU2LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
202(ClientLP2/
4(RX2/TX2)-1 ClientLP2)-1

Servive
processing
module

NS2 backplane backplane NS2


WDM side side side WDM side

71(ODU2LP/ 71(ODU2LP/
ODU2LP)-1 ODU2LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
B 1(IN/OUT)-1

Servive Servive
processing processing
module module

NS2 backplane backplane TDX


WDM side side side Client side
201(ClientLP1/
71(ODU2LP/ ClientLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)-1
ODU2LP)-1 202(ClientLP2/
C 1(IN/OUT)-1 ClientLP2)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1

Servive
processing Cross-
module connection

NOTE

ClientLP and ODU2LP are logical ports. There are cross-connections between client-side RX/TX ports
and ClientLP ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured. ODU2 cross-
connections between the ClientLP ports of the TDX board and the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board
need to be configured. There are connections between the ODU2LP ports of the NS2 board and WDM-
side IN/OUT ports and therefore cross-connections do not need to be configured.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

2.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes how to configure a bidirectional 10GE LAN service at stations A, B,
and C.

Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Context
Legend Information
Figure 2-22 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 2-22 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)

Background Information
l The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Users can select a proper
mapping mode according to the service transmission requirements.
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) meets customer requirement for transparent bit
transport of 10GE LAN signals. In the Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) mode,
transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This
ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however,
the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.
MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) is specific to transparent transmission of
10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE
LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard
OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC
frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the
FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode.
Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services.
l The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port
Mapping of the TDX board is set to Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the
71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that services
pass through must be set to Speedup Mode.
l When 10GE LAN signals are received on the client side of the TDX board and Port
Mapping of the TDX board is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Line Rate of
the 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)-1 port on the backplane side of the TN52NS2 board that
services pass through must be set to Standard Mode.
l The Service Mode must be set to ODU2 or Automatic.

Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT


Step 1 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52TDX board of station A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TDX board that you want to configure, and then
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ClientLP port, the service type that needs to be set, and then double-click the
corresponding parameter domain to set the following parameters.
Service Type: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Configuration example:

5
4

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

NOTE

5
:
When Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), the service cross-connect
granularity is ODU2e.
When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , the service cross-
connect granularity is ODU2.
5. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
6. Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 2 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52NS2 board of station A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52NS2 board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ODU2LP port. Double-click the Service Mode parameter and then select
ODU2 or Automatic.
Configuration example:

5. On the Advanced Attributes tab, select the ODU2LP port and then double-click the
Line Rate parameter and select Speedup Mode.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

3
4

NOTICE
When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TDX board is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the ODU2LP port on the NS2 board
must be set to Speedup Mode.
When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , Line Rate
must be set to Standard Mode.
Port Mapping and Line Rate of the boards that services pass must be consistent;
otherwise, service interruption occurs.

Step 3 Repeat step 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52NS2 board at station B.

Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to configure attributes of ports on the TN52TDX and TN52NS2 boards
of station C.

Step 5 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station
A.
1. Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the
ODU2LP port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-52TDX

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.6.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 6 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 7 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 boards at station B.
The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-07-52NS2

Source Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.6.2 Service Signal
Flow.

Step 8 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 9 Configure ODU2 services between the TN52NS2 board and the TN52TDX board at station C.
1. Configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TDX board to the
ODU2LP port of the TN52NS2 board. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

The following table lists the values of the parameters.

Field Value

Level ODU2

Service Type -

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot Shelf0(subrack)-13-52TQM

Source Optical Port 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)

Source Optical Channel 1

Sink Slot Shelf0(subrack)-12-52NS2

Sink Optical Port 71(ODU2LP/ODU2LP)

Sink Optical Channel 1

Activate Immediately Active

NOTE

For details on how to select a port for electrical cross-connection services, see 2.6.2 Service
Signal Flow.

Step 10 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.

----End

2.7 Configuring 10GE LAN Services Through the TQX and


NS3 Boards
This section describes how to configure 10GE LAN services through TN52TQX boards and
cross-connect ODU2 or ODU2e signals to TN54NS3 boards in one station. The other station
is configured exactly the same.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.

Legend Information
Figure 2-23 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 2-23 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Application Diagram

Figure 2-24 Position of the TQX and NS3 boards in the WDM system
4xODU2/ODU2e 4xODU2/ODU2e

M M

1ODU3/ODU3e
4ODU2/ODU2e

4ODU2/ODU2e
1ODU3/ODU3e
1OTU3/OTU3e

1OTU3/OTU3e
1 1 1 U U IN 1 1 1
OUT
X X
TQX IN / / OUT TQX
D D
M M
4 4 4 U U 4 4 4
X X
NS3 NS3

Cross-Connection Diagram
NOTE

In this configuring process, a TN54NS3 board in compatible mode is used as an example in Figure
2-25.

Figure 2-25 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX and NS3 boards


WDM side

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2
NS3

71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3 (compatible mode)


71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4
Cross connect mode

Client side

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
TQX
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Cross connect mode

The client side of the TQX board are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 board

Procedure
Step 1 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN52TQX board of station A.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TQX board that you want to configure, and then
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ClientLP port, the service type that needs to be set, and then double-click the
corresponding parameter domain to set the following parameters.
Service Type: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)

3
1

5
4

NOTE

5
:When the service type is 10GE LAN, the service mapping path can be Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) . Users can select the service
mapping path based on the service transmission requirements.
When Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), the service cross-connect
granularity is ODU2e. When Port Mapping is set to MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , the
service cross-connect granularity is ODU2.
5. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
6. Click Query, In the dialog box that is displayed, click Close. Ensure that the query result
is consistent with the configuration.
Step 2 Configure attributes of client-side ports on the TN54NS3 board of station A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN54NS3 board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab.
4. Select the ODU2 port. Double-click the Service Mode parameter and then select ODU2
or Automatic.
5. Select the ODU3 port. Double-click the Service Mode parameter and then select
Automatic or MIX.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

6. On the Advanced Attributes tab, select the ODU2 port and ODU3 port and double-click
the Line Rate parameter and set to Speedup Mode.

3
4

NOTICE
When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TQX board is set to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Line Rate of the corresponding ODU2 port of the
TN54NS3 board must be set to Speedup Mode. Line Rate of the ODU3 port must
be set to Speedup Mode.
When Port Mapping of the ClientLP port on the TQX board is set to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) , Line Rate of the corresponding ODU2 port of the
TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode. Line Rate of the ODU3 port can be
set to Standard Mode or Speedup Mode.
Port Mapping and Line Rate of the boards that services pass must be consistent;
otherwise, service interruption occurs.

7. Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.


8. Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
Step 3 In the NE Explorer,configure ODU2 services from the ClientLP port of the TN52TQX board
to the ODU2LP port of the TN54NS3 board.
Configuration example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

3
4
1

----End

2.8 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

2.8.1 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration


In this user interface, you can configure the cross-connections of various WDM services.

Table 2-8 WDM Cross-Connection Configuration


Field Value Description

Level Values of parameters vary The Level parameter is used


with different boards and to differentiate the service
products. types configured when
electrical cross-connections
are configured.
Click Level (WDM Cross-
Connection Configuration)
for more information.

Service Type For example, FE, STM-1, When Level of a new


FICON service is set to Any, you
can select a specific service
type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value Description

Occupied ODTUk l When Level is ODUflex The number of ODUflex


Timeslots and Service Type is set timeslots for received
to Custom: 1-8 services. This parameter is
Default: 8 set based on the type and
l It cannot be set rate of the service received
manually. by the port. The parameter
value ranges from 1 to 8.
l When Level is ODUflex
NOTE
and Service Type is set
Set this parameter when Level
to FC400: this parameter of a WDM cross-connection is
is 4 ODUflex and Service Type is
l When Level is ODUflex Custom or PACKET.
and Service Type is set
to FC800: this parameter
is 7
l When Level is ODUflex
and Service Type is set
to 3GSDI or InfiniBand
2.5G: this parameter is 3

Service Rate(bit/s) 1-9993964557 The parameter value varies


according to the value of
Occupied ODTUk
Timeslots in the range of 1
to 9993964557.
NOTE
Set this parameter when Level
of a WDM cross-connection is
ODUflex and Service Type is
Custom.

Direction Unidirectional, The Direction parameter


Bidirectional. indicates the service
Default: Unidirectional direction mode when the
service cross-connection is
configured. It can be set to
either Unidirectional or
Bidirectional.
Click Direction (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Field Value Description

Source Channel Slot ID-Board Name- The Source Channel


Optical Interface ID-Optical parameter is used to query
Channel ID the transmit channel of a
Default: Null certain electrical cross-
connect service
(unidirectional service
flow).
Click Source Channel
(WDM Cross-Connection)
for more information.

Sink Channel Slot ID - Board Name - The Sink Channel


Optical Interface ID - parameter is used to query
Optical Channel ID the receive channel of a
Default: Null certain electrical cross-
connect service
(unidirectional service
flow).
Click Sink Channel (WDM
Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Activation Status Active, Inactive The Activation Status


Default: Active parameter is used to display
whether the service cross-
connection configuration is
activated.
Click Activation Status
(WDM Cross-Connection
Configuration) for more
information.

Service Origin Create Manually, Displays the mode of


Intelligently Generate creating WDM cross-
connections.

Lock Status Unknown, Locked, Indicates the lockout status


Unlocked of an electrical cross-
Default: Unlocked connection.

2.8.2 WDM Timeslot Configuration


In this user interface, you can configure WDM services. You can specify ports and timeslots
for transmitting and receiving services, and set the client-side service protocol.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring WDM Services (Manually by Station)

Table 2-9 Parameters of WDM services


Parameters Value Description

Port NE-Slot-Board-Optical The Port parameter


Interface-Channel indicates the location of the
service timeslots, including
the channel, optical
interface, board, slot, and
NE where the timeslots
reside.

Service Type For example: FE, STM-1, The Service Type parameter
FICON is used to set the type of the
services at an optical port
when the cross-connections
of any services are
configured, to match the
type of the actual services.

Transmit Timeslot 1 to 16 The Transmit Timeslot


parameter is used to select
the service timeslots in the
transmit direction.
The Send Timeslot
parameter is used to select
the service timeslots in the
transmit direction.
Click Service Timeslot
(WDM Services) for more
information.

Receive Timeslot 1 to 16 The Receive Timeslot


parameter is used to select
the service timeslots on the
receive direction.
Click Service Timeslot
(WDM Services) for more
information.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by


the TOM Board by Station

About This Chapter

This section describes how to manually configure services carried by the TOM board by
station.

3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by Station)


A TN11TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN11TOM board is
applicable to five scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN11TOM board by station
on the NMS for the five application scenarios.
3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)
A TN52TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN52TOM board is
applicable to 12 scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN52TOM board by station
on the NMS for the 12 application scenarios.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

3.1 Configuring the TN11TOM Board (Manually by


Station)
A TN11TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN11TOM board is
applicable to five scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN11TOM board by station
on the NMS for the five application scenarios.

3.1.1 Overview of the Working Modes


This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service
signal flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are
set to specific values.

Board mode
As shown in Table 3-1, the TN11TOM boards support the cascading and non-cascading
modes.

Table 3-1 Board mode of the TN11TOM board

Board mode Description

Cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN11TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one or
two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a
maximum of eight client-side services.

Non-cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN11TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to
eight ODU0 services or one to four ODU1 services.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a
maximum of four client-side services.

Port Working Mode


The TOA board supports five working modes listed in Table 3-2. You can set the port
working modes on the NMS.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Table 3-2 Mappings between the working modes and the service mapping paths
Board Configuration Port Working Mapping Path
Working Scenario Mode
Mode

Cascading mode 3.1.2 Scenario 1: N/A OTU1/Anya->ODU1


ODU1 tributary
mode
(cascading)

3.1.3 Scenario 2: N/A OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1
tributary-line
mode
(cascading)

Non-cascading 3.1.4 Scenario 3: N/A OTU1/Any->ODU1


mode ODU1 tributary
mode (non-
cascading)

3.1.5 Scenario 4: N/A Any->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1
tributary-line
mode (non-
cascading)

3.1.6 Scenario 5: N/A OTU1->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1
tributary-line
mode (electrical
regeneration
board)

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding
application scenario.

3.1.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-1 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-1 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary
mode (cascading))
1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, FDDI, TX1 M M TX1 FE, GE, FDDI,
STM-1, OC-3, U U
DVB-ASI, STM-1, OC-3,
X X DVB-ASI,

1ODU1

1ODU1
STM-16, OC- N N

8Any

8Any
/ / STM-16, OC-
48, ESCON, S S
D D 48, ESCON,
STM-4, OC-12, 2 2
RX8 M M RX8 STM-4, OC-12,
FC100, FICON, U U
FC200, FICON FC100, FICON,
X X
Express, OTU1 TX8 TX8 FC200, FICON
Express, OTU1

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-2 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-2 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary
mode (cascading))
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Line board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2
in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3
mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
compatible
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
10(TX8/RX8)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53NS2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2


mode)

NOTE

A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-3 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-3 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Setthe Board Modeof the TN11TOM boardtoCascading mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Operation Example:

Step 2 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 3 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board.
Operation Example in the client service type for FE, for example ,For other services types,
configuration is the same:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Service Level to GE or ANY. If you set Service Level to ANY, you can set
Service Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN11TOM and
TN12NS2 boards.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.1.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in
cascading ODU1 mode with its ports working in tributary-line mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-4 lists two conditions in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1
tributary-line mode. Perform the configurations for this board according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board receives a
maximum of six services on the client side. The other two client-side ports work as
WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board
receives a maximum of seven services on the client side, and the other client-side port
works as a WDM-side port, which also receives services.

Figure 3-4 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (cascading))
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 TX7 RX7
FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC- MUX/ MUX/ 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
RX7 DMUX DMUX TX7
12, STM-16, OC- 12, STM-16, OC-

1ODU1
1OTU1

1ODU1
1OTU1
6Any

6Any
48,ESCON, 48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,
TX8 RX8
FC200, FICON RX6 RX6 FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI, MUX/ MUX/
RX8 DMUX TX8 Express, DVB-ASI,
OTU1 DMUX
TX6 TX6 OTU1

Any Any

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1
RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, FDDI, STM- TX1 TX1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC- 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC- TX8 RX8 12, STM-16, OC-
1ODU1
1OTU1

1ODU1
1OTU1
7Any

48,ESCON, 48,ESCON,

7Any
MUX/ MUX/
FC100, FICON, RX8 DMUX DMUX TX8 FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON FC200, FICON
RX7 RX7
Express, DVB-ASI, Express, DVB-ASI,
OTU1 OTU1
TX7 TX7

Any Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-5 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Figure 3-5 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (cascading))
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:
Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-6 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-6 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Setthe Board Modeof the TN11TOM boardtoCascading mode.
Operation Example:

Step 2 Configure the WDM-side optical ports.Operation Example

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

2
4

6
5

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.
1. For the application of the single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side, set RX7/TX7 or
RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical port.
2. For the application of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, set both RX7/TX7 and
RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical ports.
3. If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 4 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the Any services that are sent to the board. Note that the figure assumes
that the client service type is FE. For other services, the configuration is similar.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining Any services.


The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM
board.
n this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service
Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 6 Configure ODU1 cross-connections from the ClientLP ports to the ODU1LP ports on the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 6 to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

Step 7 Configure OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP ports and WDM-side
ports.Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:
1

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are for dual feeding. The service on the working
channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as unidirectional.
In this example, port 10 (RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the protection
channel port.

Step 8 Optional: Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN11TOM board.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

NOTE

For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, this step is mandatory.

----End

3.1.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-7 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-7 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary
mode (non-cascading))
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 RX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3, 1 1 GE, STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12, STM-4, OC-12,

4ODU1
4ODU1

8Any
8Any
STM-16, OC-48 MUX/ MUX/ STM-16, OC-48
NS2 NS2
, FC200, FICON DMUX DMUX , FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI, RX8 TX8 Express, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FDDI, 4 4 ESCON, FDDI,
OTU1 TX8 RX8 OTU1

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-8 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-8 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary
mode (non-cascading))
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 TOM
10(TX8/RX8)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN11ND2 / TN12ND2 / TN52ND2 / TN51NQ2 / TN52NQ2 / TN11NS2 /


(Compatible mode) TN12NS2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode)

Other board (Standard TN53NS2 / TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2


mode)

NOTE
A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-9 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-9 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode.Operation Example:

1 3

Step 2 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 3 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the Any services that are sent to the board. Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Complete the settings as shown in the following figure. Note that the figure assumes that the client service
type is FE. For other services, the configuration is similar.
The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Service Level to GE or ANY. If you set Service Level to ANY, you can set
Service Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 5 Configure a bidirectional ODU1 cross-connection between the TN12NS2 line board and the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.Repeat to configure the remaining cross-
connections between the TN11TOM and TN12NS2 boards.

----End

3.1.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-10 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-10 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (non-cascading))
4xOTU1 4xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
TX1 RX5 TX5 TX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3 GE, STM-1, OC-3

4ODU1
4OTU1
4ODU1

4OTU1
, STM-4, OC-12, , STM-4, OC-12,

4Any
4Any
DVB-ASI, ESCON, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, ESCON,
FDDI, FC200, FICON DMUX DMUX FDDI, FC200,
TX8 RX8
Express, STM-16, RX4 RX4 FICON Express,
OC-48 STM-16, OC-48
TX4 RX8 TX8
TX4

Any Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To the mesh group slots

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-11 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Figure 3-11 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (non-cascading))
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1


1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 9(TX7/RX7)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 10(TX8/RX8)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM
module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports
as an example.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-12 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-12 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode.Operation Example:

1 3

Step 2 Configure the WDM-side optical ports.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

2
4

6
5

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Optional: When the client service type is ,Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode.
Operation Example:
1

Step 4 Configure the service type for the ports on the TN11TOM board.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the Any services that are sent to the board. Note that the figure assumes
that the client service type is FE. For other services, the configuration is similar.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining Any services.


The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN11TOM
board.
n this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service
Type to a specific service, such as FE.

Step 6 Configure ODU1 cross-connections from the ClientLP ports to the ODU1LP ports on the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Repeat Step 6 to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

Step 7 Configure a cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port on the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Configure a cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port, and select the port for
which the port type is changed in Step 2.
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

----End

3.1.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical


regeneration board)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN11TOM board that works as an
electrical regeneration board with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system in which the
TN11TOM board works as an electrical regeneration board and its ports work in ODU1
tributary-line mode.

Figure 3-13 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (electrical regeneration board))

4xOTU1 4xOTU1

RX1 TOM TX1


4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1

DMUX MUX

RX4 TX4

4xOTU1 4xOTU1

TX1 TOM RX1


4ODU1

4OTU1
4OTU1

MUX DMUX
TX4 RX4

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-14 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-14 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (electrical regeneration board))
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1


1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 9(TX7/RX7)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 10(TX8/RX8)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM
module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports
as an example.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.

Legend Information
Figure 3-15 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-15 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Non-cascading mode.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1 3

Step 2 Configure the WDM-side optical ports.Operation Example:

1
3

2
4

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
5

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

Step 3 Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN11TOM board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE
Because the service type is OTU-1, set Service Mode of ports to OTN Mode.

Step 4 Set the service type to OTU-1 for the port. Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the OTU1 services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 6 Configure the cross-connections from the ClientLP ports to the ODU1LP ports on the
TN11TOM board for the ODU1 services.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 7 Configure a cross-connection between the ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.Operation
Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Selected in the WDM-side optical portsStep 2to modefy the Port type of port
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

----End

3.2 Configuring the TN52TOM Board (by Station)


A TN52TOM board can work in cascading or non-cascading mode and be configured with
different port working modes. Based on different working modes, the TN52TOM board is
applicable to 12 scenarios. You need to manually configure the TN52TOM board by station
on the NMS for the 12 application scenarios.

3.2.1 Overview of the Working Modes


Each port on the TN52TOM board can work in different modes so that services can be
processed on different paths.

Board Working mode


As shown in Table 3-3, the TN52TOM boards support the cascading and non-cascading
modes.

Table 3-3 Board Working mode of the TN52TOM board

Board Description
Working
mode

Cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one or
two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a
maximum of eight client-side services.

Non-cascading l A maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) client-side services can
mode be input to the TN52TOM board through the SFP module on the
client side.
l The services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to
eight ODU0 services or one to four ODU1 services.
l Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a
maximum of four client-side services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Port Working Mode


The TN52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition, you
are advised to set the application scenarios, such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and
tributary-line mode, of the ports on the board. As shown in Table 3-4, the TN52TOM board
supports 14 different working modes.

Table 3-4 Mapping between the working modes and the mapping path of the TN52TOM
board
Board Configuration Port Working Mode Mapping Path
Working Scenario
mode

3.2.4 Scenario 1: ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]


ODU0 mode
(cascading)

3.2.5 Scenario 2: ODU0 Tributary-Line Any->ODU0->ODU1-


ODU0 tributary- mode >OTU1
line mode
(cascading)

Cascading 3.2.6 Scenario 3: ODU1 mode Any->ODU1


ODU1 mode
(cascading)

3.2.7 Scenario 4: ODU1 Tributary-Line Any->ODU1->OTU1


ODU1 tributary- mode
line mode
(cascading)

- None (not for ports) -

3.2.8 Scenario 5: ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[->ODU1]


ODU0 mode
(non-cascading)

3.2.9 Scenario 6: ODU0 Tributary-Line Any->ODU0->ODU1-


ODU0 tributary- Mode >OTU1
line mode (non-
cascading)
Non- 3.2.10 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode OTU1/Any->ODU1
Cascading ODU1 mode
(non-cascading)

3.2.11 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_O OTU1->ODU1->Any-


ODU1_ANY_OD DU1 re-encapsulation >ODU0->ODU1
U0_ODU1 re- mode
encapsulation
mode (non-
cascading)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Board Configuration Port Working Mode Mapping Path


Working Scenario
mode

3.2.12 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_O OTU1->ODU1->Any-


ODU1_ANY_OD DU1 re-encapsulation >ODU0->ODU1->OTU1
U0_ODU1 re- tributary-line mode
encapsulation
tributary-line
mode (non-
cascading)

3.2.13 Scenario ODU1 tributary-line OTU1/Any->ODU1-


10: ODU1 mode >OTU1
tributary-line
mode (non-
cascading)

3.2.14 Scenario ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0


11: ODU1_ODU0
mode (non-
cascading)

3.2.15 Scenario ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re- OTU1->ODU1->Any-


12: encapsulation mode >ODU0
ODU1_ANY_OD
U0 re-
encapsulation
mode (non-
cascading)

- None (not for ports) -

a: "Any" in the table indicates the client-side service supported in the corresponding
application scenario.

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode,
there are two service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.
l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other
ports.

3.2.2 Configuration Principles


This section describes the principles for configuring the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Table 3-5 Rules for configuring the TN52TOM board


Item Description

Slots For the OptiX OSN 3800:


l When two TN52TOM boards are used to configure GE service and Any
service cross-connections, the TN52TOM boards must be installed in the
following slots:
IU2 and IU3
IU4 and IU5
l When two TN52TOM boards are used to configure ODU1 cross-
connections, the TN52TOM boards must be installed in the following slots:
IU2 and IU4
IU2 and IU5
IU3 and IU4
IU3 and IU5

Applicat The following port working mode scenarios are only supported by the OptiX
ion OSN 8800.
scenario l Application Scenario 11: Non-cascading ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1-
s >ODU1->ODU0)
l Application Scenario 12: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
The following port working mode application scenarios are only supported by
the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
l Application Scenario 8: Non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)

Cross- l The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support distributed cross-connection.
connect l For the OptiX OSN 6800,
The TN52TOM board can cross-connect a maximum of six Any services
through the backplane.
The TN52TOM boards in paired slots can cross-connect Any services.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800,
The TN52TOM board can cross-connect a maximum of six Any services
through the backplane.
The TN52TOM boards in a mesh slot group support cross-connections
of Any services between each other.
Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner
that the ClientLP3-1 port on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to
the ODU1LP1-3 port on the TN52NS2 board and the ClientLP5-1 port
on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on
the TN52NS2 board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Item Description

WDM- In the cascading tributary-line mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used
side as the WDM-side optical ports.
optical In the non-cascading tributary-line mode, all RX/TX optical ports can be used
ports as WDM-side optical ports.
In the tributary mode, none of the RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-
side optical ports.

Port In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to
working different port working modes.
mode

Channel In the cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)) and ODU0 tributary-


line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1):
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are
identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the
same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is
configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel.
In the non-cascading ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) and ODU0
tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1):
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are
identified by the same number, these two channels cannot be used at the
same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 channel is
configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel.
l Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and
ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this
restriction.
When the board works in any mode, the source and sink channel IDs for
services must be consistent. For example, if a client-side service is configured
at ClientLPX.1, the service must also be configured at ClientLPY.1 on the
interconnected board. If a client-side service is configured at ClientLPX.2, the
service must also be configured at ClientLPY.2 on the interconnected board. In
other words, service interconnection must be implemented at channels with the
same ID, although the port numbers may be different.

3.2.3 Configuration Flow


Twelve port working modes are available for the TN52TOM board on the NMS. All of these
modes require configurations.
Figure 3-16 shows the general configuration flow for the port working modes on the
TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-16 Configuration flow

Tributary Mode Tributary-Line Mode

Configure the Working Configure the Working


Mode Mode

Configure the Service Configure the Port


Mode Type

Configure the Service


Configure Service Type Mode

Configure the Cross- Configure Service Type


connections from the
RX/TX Ports to the
ClientLP Ports Configure the Cross-
connections from the
RX/TX Ports to the
Configure the Cross- ClientLP Ports
connections between
AnyLP ports
Configure the Cross-
connections between
AnyLP ports
Configure Inter-Board
Cross-connections
Configure the Cross-
connections from the
ODU1LP Ports to the
RX/TX Ports

Configure Intra-Board Mandatory


1+1 Protection
Optional

The actions that are labeled "optional" in the preceding figure are required only in specific
scenarios. The following provides the details:
l Configure the service mode:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

If the service type is OTU1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode for the port.
If the service type is any other service, retain the default value CLIENT Mode for
the port.
l Configure the cross-connections between AnyLP ports:
This operation is mandatory for scenario 8 "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation mode (non-cascading)" and scenario 9 "ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1
re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading)".
This operation is not required for any other scenarios.
l Configure intra-board 1+1 protection:
This operation is mandatory for the application of "dual-fed and selectively
receiving on the WDM side" in the Tributary-Line Mode.
This operation is not required for any other scenarios.

3.2.4 Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)).
Note that "(->ODU1)" in the mapping path means the ODU1 procedure is optional.

Application Diagram
Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system in
which the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0(-
>ODU1)).

Figure 3-17 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1)


(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 M M TX1
U U
FE, GE, X X FE, GE,
2ODU0
1ODU1

1ODU1
2ODU0

N N
8Any

FC100, FICON,
8Any

/ / FC100, FICON,
DVB-ASI, SDI, S D S DVB-ASI, SDI,
D
ESCON, FDDI RX8 2 2
M M RX8 ESCON, FDDI
U U
TX8 X X TX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-18 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 1: Any->ODU0) (OptiX
OSN 8800)
2xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 2xODU0

RX1 TOM TOM


TX1
1 1 M M 1 1
TX1 RX1
U U
FE, GE, X X FE, GE,

2ODU0
N N

8Any
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,

2ODU0
8Any
/ /
DVB-ASI, SDI, S D S DVB-ASI, SDI,
D
ESCON, FDDI 2 M 2 ESCON, FDDI
RX8 M TX8
U U
2 2 2 2
TX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-19 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

161(ODU0LP1
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 /ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-20 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1: Any->ODU0)


(OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 Line/PID
board in
standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode
Other board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 2
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
10(TX8/RX8)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-21 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-21 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE
Port Working Modeis ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)).

Step 2 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of these services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be greater than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 3 to configure the remaining services.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.
When ODU1 cross-connections are created, ODU0 cross-connections from the ClientLP port to the
ODU0LP port on the TN52TOM board are automatically created.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TN52TOM
and TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 8800.


This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.
When creating the cross-connection of the ODU0 signal, only the first channel can be selected, for
example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Repeat to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.

----End

3.2.5 Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-22 lists two conditions in which the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU0
tributary-line mode. Perform the configurations according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of six services on the client side. The other two client-side ports work as
WDM-side ports, selectively receiving services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of seven services on the client side. The other client-side port works
as a WDM-side port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-22 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1-


>OTU1)
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:
1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 RX1
TOM RX7 TOM
TX7
TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1
RX7 DMUX DMUX TX7
FE, GE, FE, GE,
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,

2ODU0
1ODU1

1ODU1
2ODU0
1OTU1

1OTU1
6Any

6Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI ESCON, FDDI
RX6 TX8 RX8 RX6
MUX/ MUX/
RX8 DMUX DMUX TX8
TX6 TX6

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 RX1
FE, GE, FE, GE,
TX8 RX8

2ODU0
FC100, FICON,
2ODU0
1ODU1

1ODU1
1OTU1

1OTU1 FC100, FICON,


7Any

7Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, MUX/ MUX/
RX8 DMUX TX8 DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI DMUX
RX7 TX7ESCON, FDDI

TX7 RX7

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-23 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-23 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 2: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1->OTU1)
The dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Client side WDM side


3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1/ 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
/ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 TOM
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1/ 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP1)-1 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
/ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 TOM
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Legend Information
Figure 3-24 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-24 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE
Port Working Modeis ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0(->ODU1)).

Step 2 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of the single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side, set RX7/TX7
or RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical port.
l For the application of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, set both RX7/TX7
and RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical ports.
If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of these services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be greater than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and
10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/
TX7) ports.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports used for dual feeding. The service
on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 10(RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9(RX7/TX7) is the
protection channel port.
Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:


1

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

----End

3.2.6 Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-25 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Figure 3-25 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 3: Any->ODU1)


1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 RX1
FE, STM-1, STM-4, M M FE, STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3, OC- U U STM-16, OC-3, OC-
12, OC-48, FC100, X X 12, OC-48, FC100,
1ODU1

1ODU1

N N
8Any

8Any

GE, FC200, FICON, / / GE, FC200, FICON,


S D S
FICON Express, D FICON Express,
2 M 2 TX8
HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, RX8 M HD-SDI, DVB-ASI,
SDI, ESCON, FDDI U U SDI, ESCON, FDDI
TX8 X X RX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-26 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-26 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 3: Any->ODU1)


WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Line board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2
in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3
mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
compatible
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 TOM
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
10(TX8/RX8)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


(Compatible TN54ENQ2
mode)
Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
(Standard mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-27 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-27 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modeof the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

NOTE
Port Working Modemust beODU1 mode (Any->ODU1).

Step 2 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan. Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/STM-4/OC-12/GE/
FC100/FICON/STM-16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI services at the same time, but the
total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l The total rate of services that are received by each group of ClientLP ports, such as
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l Each group of ClientLP ports can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s,
and this service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. Operation Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 3 to configure the remaining services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.2.7 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-28 shows two applications where the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU1
tributary-line mode. Perform configurations according to the network design.
l Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of six channels of services on the client side and the other two client-side
ports work as WDM-side ports, dual-fed selectively receiving services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of seven channels of services on the client side and the other client-
side port works as a WDM-side port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-28 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU1)

Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 TOM TOM RX1


TX7 RX7
FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 TX1 FE, GE, STM-1,
MUX/ MUX/ STM-4, STM-16,
STM-4, STM-16, RX7 DMUX DMUX TX7
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
OC-3, OC-12, OC-

1ODU1

1ODU1
1OTU1

1OTU1
6Any
48, FC100, FC200,

6Any
48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON
FICON, FICON TX8 RX8
Express, HD-SDI, RX6 MUX/ MUX/ RX6 Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, RX8 DMUX DMUX TX8
ESCON, FDDI
ESCON, FDDI TX6 TX6

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


1xOTU1 1xOTU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 RX1 FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC- TX8 RX8 OC-3, OC-12, OC-
1ODU1

1ODU1
1OTU1

1OTU1
7Any

7Any
48, FC100, FC200, MUX/ MUX/ 48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON RX8 TX8 FICON, FICON
DMUX DMUX
Express, HD-SDI, RX7 TX7 Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI TX7 RX7 ESCON, FDDI

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-29 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-29 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 4: Any->ODU1-


>OTU1)

Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


Client side WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5
8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6
9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Legend Information
Figure 3-30 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-30 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Mode of the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

Step 2 Configure the working mode for the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of the single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side, set RX7/TX7
or RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical port.
l For the application of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, set both RX7/TX7
and RX8/TX8 as the WDM-side optical ports.
If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan.Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/STM-4/OC-12/GE/
FC100/FICON/STM-16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI services at the same time, but the
total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l Services can be input at the six or seven pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
l A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this
service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and
10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/
TX7) ports.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports used for dual feeding. The service
on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 10(RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9(RX7/TX7) is the
protection channel port.
Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:


1

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

----End

3.2.8 Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-31 and Figure 3-32 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-31 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1)


(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 M M RX1
1 1 1 1
U U
FE, GE, FE, GE,
X X

8ODU0
4ODU1

4ODU1
8ODU0
FC100, FICON, N N FC100, FICON,

8Any

8Any
/ /
DVB-ASI, SDI, S S DVB-ASI, SDI,
D D
ESCON, FDDI 2 2
RX8 M M TX8 ESCON, FDDI
4 4 U U 4 4
TX8 X X RX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Figure 3-32 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 5: Any->ODU0)(OptiX


OSN 8800)
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX1 M M RX1
1 1 1 1
FE, GE, U U
X X FE, GE,
8ODU0

FC100, FICON,
8ODU0

N N FC100, FICON,
8Any

8Any

DVB-ASI, SDI, / /
S D S DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI D
2 M 2 TX8 ESCON, FDDI
RX8 M
U U
8 8 X X 8 8 RX8
TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34 show the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-33 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 161(ODU0LP1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1
1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
9(TX7/RX7)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
10(TX8/RX8)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 /ODU0LP2)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 163(ODU0LP3
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 /ODU0LP3)-1
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4
TOM 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 /ODU0LP4)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


(Compatible TN54ENQ2
mode)
Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
(Standard mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-34 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5: Any->ODU0)


(OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 mode
Other board
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
7(TX5/RX5)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
9(TX7/RX7)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4
10(TX8/RX8)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 TOM
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-35 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-35 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE
Port Working Modemust beODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).

Step 2 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service planning. Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type leads to a service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of these services must be less than or equal to 2.5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type cannot be
configured.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are input at each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)-8, cannot be greater than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 3 to configure the remaining services.

Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800 and 3800.
This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.
When ODU1 cross-connections are created, ODU0 cross-connections from the ClientLP port to
ODU0LP on the TN52TOM board are automatically created.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the TN52TOM
and TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

NOTE

Repeat to configure a cross-connection for the remaining ODU0 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.
This configuration is only supported by the OptiX OSN 8800.
This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.2.9 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-36 shows two conditions where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading
ODU0 tributary-line mode. Perform configurations according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of four channels of services on the client side and the other two client-side
ports work as WDM-side ports, selectively receiving services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of six channels of services on the client side and the other client-
side port works as a WDM-side port.

Figure 3-36 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 6: Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

2xOTU1 2xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
RX5 TX5
TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1
TX6 DMUX DMUX RX6
FE, GE, FE, GE,
RX6 TX6
FC100, FICON,

2ODU1

4ODU0
FC100, FICON,

4ODU0

2ODU1

2OTU1
2OTU1

4Any
4Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, TX7 RX7 DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI ESCON, FDDI
RX4 RX7 TX7 RX4
MUX/ MUX/
TX8 DMUX RX8
DMUX
TX4 TX4
RX8 TX8

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


2xOTU1 2xOTU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
TX7 RX7
TX1 RX1
FE, GE, RX7 TX7
FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,

2ODU1
2OTU1

4ODU0
2ODU1
2OTU1

FC100, FICON,
4ODU0

6Any
6Any

DVB-ASI, SDI, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, SDI,


ESCON, FDDI TX8 DMUX DMUX RX8
ESCON, FDDI
RX6 TX6
RX8 TX8
TX6 RX6

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-37 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-37 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 6: Any->ODU0-


>ODU1->OTU1)
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:
Client side 161(ODU0LP1/
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ 7(TX5/RX5)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 ODU0LP1)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 3 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 162(ODU0LP1/ 52(ODU1LP2/
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ TOM
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Client side 161(ODU0LP1/


WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 ODU0LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 3
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ 10(TX8/RX8)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 162(ODU0LP1/ 52(ODU1LP2/
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP2)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ TOM
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports as an
example.

Legend Information
Figure 3-38 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-38 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTE

Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU0 tributary-line
mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
Only the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 support ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
l Before setting the working modes of the ClientLP1 port to ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1), set the working modes of the ClientLP5 port to None (not for ports).
l Before setting the working modes of the ClientLP3 port to ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1), set the working modes of the ClientLP7 port to None (not for ports).

Step 2 Set the port type.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


If Type of a port is set to Line Side Color Optical Port, ensure that an optical module transmitting the
same wavelength signals as the corresponding port of the M40 board has been configured on the port.

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan.Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the Service Rate(Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FE/FDDI/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/GE/FC100/FICON services at the
same time, but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 5 Gbit/s.
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by the same
number, these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 channel. Service configurations at the ClentLP3 and ClientLP4,
ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and ClientLP8 ports must also comply with this
restriction.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
l The total rate of services that are received by each group of ClientLP ports, such as
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and
10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 9(RX7/
TX7) ports.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports used for dual feeding. The service
on the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 10(RX8/TX8) is the working channel port, and port 9(RX7/TX7) is the
protection channel port.
Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example:


1

Step 6 Configure selective receiving at the WDM side of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

----End

3.2.10 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-39 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 7: OTU1->ODU1)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 TX1

4ODU1

4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1
OTU1 4 MUX/ MUX/ OTU1
NS2 NS2 4
DMUX DMUX
RX8 RX8

TX8 4 4
TX8

ODU1 ODU1

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Figure 3-40 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 7:Any->ODU1)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 TX1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, STM-1, TX1 RX1 FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, 1 1 STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC- OC-3, OC-12, OC-
4ODU1
4ODU1
8Any

8Any
48, FC100, FC200, MUX/ MUX/ 48, FC100, FC200,
NS2 NS2
FICON, FICON DMUX DMUX FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI, RX8 TX8 Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, 4 4 DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI TX8 RX8 ESCON, FDDI

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-41 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-41 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 7: OTU1/Any-


>ODU1)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
mode
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 2
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 TOM
10(TX8/RX8)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-42 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-42 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).
Step 2 Optional: Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

NOTE

l If the service type is OTU-1, set Service Mode to OTN Mode for the port.
l If the service type is another service, retain the default value Client Modefor the port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board according to the service plan. Operation
Example:

NOTICE
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service encapsulation types specified
for the transmitter and receiver are the same.

NOTE

l If you set Service Type to Any, you must set the Service Rate(Mbit/s).you also must set the
service rate in Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s).
l The board can receive the FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/FDDI/FE/SDI/
STM-1/OC-3/FC200/FICON Express/HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services at the same time,
but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10 Gbit/s.
l A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this
service can be configured on only the first channel of the ClientLP port.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining services.

Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the TN52TOM and
TN52NS2 boards.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

The inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards must
be configured as shown below.

Product TN52TOM board TN52NS2 board

OptiX OSN 3800 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1

205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2

203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3

207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800 A cross-connection can be configured between any port on


the TN52TOM board and any port on the TN52NS2 board.

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.


Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

----End

3.2.11 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation


mode (non-cascading)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Application Diagram
Figure 3-43 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1).

Figure 3-43 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
4xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 4xODU1

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 M M 1 1 TX1
U U
X X

8ODU0

8Any
4ODU1

4ODU1
4ODU1

4ODU1

4OTU1
8ODU0
4OTU1

64Any

N N

64Any
8Any
8Any

8Any

32Any
/ /
32Any

OTU1 4 4 OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
4 4 4 4
TX8 X X TX8

Any ODU1 ODU1 Any

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

OptiX OSN 6800: N/A

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-44 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-44 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1-


>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
Cross-connect
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode
module

Client side

201(ClientLP1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1


3(TX1/RX1)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1
/ClientLP1)-1
1 2 3 2 4
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8
/ClientLP3)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
205(ClientLP5 162(ODU0LP2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ClientLP5)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 /ODU0LP2)-1

234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1
203(ClientLP7
7(TX5/RX5)-1 /ClientLP7)-1
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8
242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 163(ODU0LP3
8(TX6/RX6)-1 /ODU0LP3)-1
236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8
9(TX7/RX7)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-7 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 164(ODU0LP4


236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 /ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM module module module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


(Compatible TN54ENQ2
mode)
Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
(Standard mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-45 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-45 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

2 4

NOTE

Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1).

Step 2 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

When the service type is OTU-1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for ports.
Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board toOTU-1.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l The board can receive a maximum of four OTU1 services at the same time.
l When configuring internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board, set the
service type to the same as the type of services that are encapsulated into the OTU1 services
received on the client side of the TN52TOM board. For example, if FE services are encapsulated
into OTU1 services on the upstream board of the TN52TOM board, set the service type to FE
when configuring the internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.
l The source and sink of an Any cross-connection must have the same channel service type. For
example, to configure a cross-connection from the AnyLP1-1 port to the AnyLP5-1 port, set the
channel service types for the two ports to the same value.
l The sum of the service rates of all channels on the AnyLP5 port must not be larger than 1.25G,
which is also the case for the AnyLP6- AnyLP12 ports.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Configure any intra-board OTU1 cross-connection between the client-side and ClientLP ports.
Ensure that the ports are identical to those configured in steps Step 2 and Step 3.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.
Step 5 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The AnyLP1 port can only be cross-connected to the AnyLP5 or AnyLP6 port. The AnyLP2 port can
only be cross-connected to the AnyLP7 or AnyLP8 port, and so on.
Repeat Step 5to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 6 Configure ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boardsOperation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.


Repeat to configure the remaining ODU1 services.

----End

3.2.12 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation


tributary-line mode (non-cascading)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-46 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-46 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
2xOTU1 2xOTU1

TX3 RX3
RX1 TOM RX3 TX3 TOM RX1
MUX/ MUX/
TX1 TX4 DMUX DMUX RX4 TX1
RX4 TX4

32Any
32Any

2ODU1
4ODU0
4ODU0
2ODU1

2OTU1
2OTU1

2ODU1
2ODU1

2OTU1
2OTU1

16Any
16Any
OTU1 TX5 OTU1
RX5
RX2 RX5 TX5 RX2
MUX/ MUX/
TX2 TX6 DMUX DMUX RX6
TX2
RX6 TX6

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-47 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-47 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 9: OTU1->ODU1-


>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
Client side WDM side

201(ClientLP1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1


3(TX1/RX1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1
/ClientLP1)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1 /ODU1LP1)-1
1 2 3
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 8(TX6/RX6)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 2 2
/ClientLP3)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 4
5(TX3/RX3)-1
205(ClientLP5 162(ODU0LP2 52(ODU1LP2 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ClientLP5)-1 /ODU0LP2)-1 /ODU1LP2)-1
238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
10(TX8/RX8)-1
207(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1

237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1

238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8

Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect


TOM module module module module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports as an
example.

Legend Information
Figure 3-48 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-48 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

1
3

5
4

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1).
l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports do not support the non-cascading ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode.
l Before the working modes of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports are set to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1
re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1), the working
modes of the ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports must be set to None (not for ports).

Step 2 Set the port type.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 3 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

When the service type is OTU-1, Service Mode must be set to OTN Mode for ports.
Step 4 Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board toOTU-1.Operation
Example:

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the OTU1 services that are input to the board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 6 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The AnyLP1 port can only be cross-connected to the AnyLP5 or AnyLP6 port. The AnyLP2 port can
only be cross-connected to the AnyLP7 or AnyLP8 port, and so on.
Repeat Step 6to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 7 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example


1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and


7(RX5/TX5), 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) and 10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a
unidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 8(RX6/
TX6)ports, and between the 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) and 9(RX7/TX7) ports.
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

NOTE

The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The service on
the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service on the protection channel must be set as
unidirectional. In this example, port 7(RX5/TX5) and 10(RX8/TX8) are the working channel port, and port
8(RX6/TX6) and 9(RX7/TX7) are the protection channel port.

Step 8 Configure the realization of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side of the
TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

6
2

NOTE

For the application of "the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", the steps above.

----End

3.2.13 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>OTU1).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Application Diagram
Figure 3-49 and Figure 3-50 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->OTU1). Perform configurations according to the network design.
l Figure 3-49 shows a scenario where OTU1 signals are electrically regenerated.
l Figure 3-50 shows a scenario where the TN52TOM board works in tributary-line mode
and receives Any signals.
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of four channels of services on the client side and the other four client-
side ports work as WDM-side ports, two of which selectively receive services.
Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of six channels of services on the client side. The other two
client-side ports work as WDM-side ports.

Figure 3-49 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 10: OTU1-
>ODU1->OTU1)
Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals:

4xOTU1 4xOTU1

TOM
RX1 TX5
D
RX2 TX6 M
4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1

M
U
U RX3 TX7 X
X RX4
TX8

TX1 RX5
D
M TX2
4ODU1
4OTU1

4OTU1

RX6 M
U
X TX3 RX7 U
X
TX4 RX8

Figure 3-50 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 10: Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)
Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

2xOTU1 2xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
RX5 TX5
4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/ TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1 4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/
TX6 RX6
OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/ DMUX DMUX OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/
FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3 RX6 TX6 FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3

2ODU1

2ODU1
2OTU1

2OTU1
4Any

4Any
2 x FC200/FICON Express/ TX7 RX7 2 x FC200/FICON Express/
HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/ RX4 RX7 TX7 RX4 HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 MUX/ MUX/ OTU1
TX8 DMUX DMUX RX8
TX4 TX4
RX8 TX8

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:


4xOTU1 4xOTU1

RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1


TOM TOM
FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 RX5 TX5 TX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3 GE, STM-1, OC-3
, STM-4, OC-12, , STM-4, OC-12,

4ODU1
4OTU1
4ODU1

4OTU1

4Any
4Any

DVB-ASI, ESCON, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, ESCON,


FDDI, FC200, DMUX DMUX FDDI, FC200,
FICON Express, RX4 TX8 RX8
RX4 FICON Express,
SDI, HD-SDI, STM- SDI, HD-SDI, STM-
16, OC-48 TX4 RX8 TX8 16, OC-48
TX4

Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800: N/A

OptiX OSN 6800: From/To paired slot

OptiX OSN 3800: From/To paired slot of the mesh group

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52 show the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-51 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10: OTU1->ODU1-
>OTU1)

OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. The dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side.


Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1


201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module TOM

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-52 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10: Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)
OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Single transmitting and single receiving
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1


1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 9(TX7/RX7)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 10(TX8/RX8)-1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

NOTE

All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports. This section uses the type of ports
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6), 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) to be used as WDM-side optical ports as an
example.

Legend Information
Figure 3-53 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-53 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

4
2

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributary-line
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
l For the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7) ports, set Port Working Mode to ODU1
tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).

Step 2 Optional: Set the port type.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

1
3

6
5

7
8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.


l For the application of "Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals", set four RX/TX ports
as WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of "Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side", set four RX/TX ports as
WDM-side optical ports.
l For the application of "Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side", set two RX/TX
ports as WDM-side optical ports.

Step 3 Optional: Configure the service mode toOTN Modefor the ports on the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE

l For the application of "Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals", set Service Mode of
the four RX/TX ports to OTN Mode.
l For the application of "Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side" and "Single transmitting
and single receiving on the WDM side", retain the default value Client Mode for the four RX/TX
ports.

Step 4 Optional: Set the service type toOTU-1of the TN52TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

For the application of "Electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals", set Service Type of the
four RX/TX ports to OTU-1.
For the application of "Dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side" and "Single transmitting and
single receiving on the WDM side", the board can receive the FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI,
STM-16, OC-48, FC100, FICON, GE, STM-4, OC-12, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FDDI, FE, SDI, STM-1,
and OC-3 services at the same time, but the total rate of the services must be less than or equal to 10
Gbit/s.

Step 5 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board.Operation Example:
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TN52TOM board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
a specific service, such as FE.
Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining services.

Step 6 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.


Parameters of the working channel,Operation Example
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Parameters of the protection channel,Operation Example


1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 7(RX5/


TX5), 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) and 10(RX8/TX8) ports.
For the application of dual-fed selectively receiving on the WDM side, configure a unidirectional OTU1
cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and 8(RX6/TX6), 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
and 9(RX7/TX7) ports.
Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.

Step 7 Optional: Configure the realization of the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM
side of the TN11TOM board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

6
2

6
2

NOTE

For the application of "the dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", the steps above.

----End

3.2.14 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading)


This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Application Diagram
Figure 3-54 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Figure 3-54 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 11: OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0)
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 M M 1 1 TX1
U U
X X

8ODU0
8ODU0

4ODU1
4ODU1

4OTU1
4OTU1

N N OTU1

8Any
8Any 4
OTU1 4 / /
S D S
D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
8 8 8 8
X X TX8
TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-55 shows the cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-55 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 11: OTU1->ODU1-
>ODU0)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 Line/PID
board in
standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
module 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1


4(TX2/RX2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 3 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
TOM

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-56 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-56 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).

Step 2 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board to OTU-1.Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board.Operation Example:
1

Repeat to configure the remaining OTU1 services.


Step 5 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Repeat to configure the remaining ODU0 cross-connections.

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

3.2.15 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode


(non-cascading)
This section describes the configuration process for the TN52TOM board that works in non-
cascading mode with its ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0).

Application Diagram
Figure 3-57 shows the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system where the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Figure 3-57 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 12: OTU1-
>ODU1->Any->ODU0)
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

RX1 RX1
TOM TOM
TX1 1 1 M M 1 1 TX1
U U
X X

4ODU1
8ODU0

4OTU1
32Any

64Any
8ODU0
4ODU1
4OTU1

64Any

32Any
N N

8Any

8Any
OTU1 4 / / 4 OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
8 8 8 8
TX8 X X TX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 3-58 shows the port configuration of the TN52TOM board.

Figure 3-58 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 12: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
mode

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
Line/PID
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
board in
compatible
Cross-connect 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
module 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1


1 2 3
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 4
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
6(TX4/RX4)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 235(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1 235(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8


236(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8
236(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
9(TX7/RX7)-1
244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM module module module module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /


(Compatible mode) TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Other board (Standard TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


mode)

Legend Information
Figure 3-59 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 3-59 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Procedure
Step 1 ConfigureBoard Working ModeandPort Working Modefor the TN52TOM
board.Operation Example:

NOTE

l Set Board Working Mode to Non-cascading mode and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ANY_ODU0
re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0).

Step 2 Set the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board to OTN Mode.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 3 Set the service type of the TN52TOM board toOTU-1.Operation Example:

NOTE

l The board can receive a maximum of four OTU1 services at the same time.
l When configuring internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board, set the
service type to the same as the type of services that are encapsulated into the OTU1 services
received on the client side of the TN52TOM board. For example, if FE services are encapsulated
into OTU1 services on the upstream board of the TN52TOM board, set the service type to FE
when configuring the internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.
l The source and sink of an Any cross-connection must have the same channel service type. For
example, to configure a cross-connection from the AnyLP1-1 port to the AnyLP5-1 port, set the
channel service types for the two ports to the same value.
l The sum of the service rates of all channels on the AnyLP5 port must not be larger than 1.25G,
which is also the case for the AnyLP6- AnyLP12 ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the
TN52TOM board for the Any services that are input to the board. Operation Example:
1

Configure any intra-board OTU1 cross-connection between the client-side and ClientLP ports.
Ensure that the ports are identical to those configured in steps 2 and 3.
Repeat Step 4 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.
Step 5 Configure internal cross-connections for Any services on the TN52TOM board.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

NOTE

The AnyLP1 port can only be cross-connected to the AnyLP5 or AnyLP6 port. The AnyLP2 port can
only be cross-connected to the AnyLP7 or AnyLP8 port, and so on.
Repeat Step 5 to configure the remaining Any services.

Step 6 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards.Operation
Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Manually Configuring Services Carried by the TOM
Configuration Guide Board by Station

Repeat to configure the remaining ODU0 cross-connections.

NOTE

This step uses the compatible mode board as an example.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board


(Manually by Station)

About This Chapter

The THA and TOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is
applicable to various scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by
station on the NMS for the application scenarios.
The THA and TOA boards are almost the same except for the number of optical ports. The
THA board provides 16 optical ports while the TOA board provides 8 optical ports. This
chapter uses the TOA board as an example for illustration. The descriptions and configuration
of the THA board are similar to those of the TOA board.
The THA board differs from the TOA board in the following aspects:
l The client-side ports 3(TX1/RX1) to 10(TX8/RX8) on the THA board can be configured
with cross-connections only to the LP ports 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1; the client-side ports 11(TX9/RX9) to 18(TX16/RX16) on
the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the LP ports
209(ClientLP9/ClientLP9)-1 to 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1.
l The THA board cannot receive SDI, HD-SDI and HDSDIRBR services on the client
side.
l The THA board does not support ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).
Therefore, all configurations related to this port working mode are applicable only to the
TOA board.
4.1 Overview of the Working Mode
Each port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.
4.2 Configuration Procedures
Six port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.
4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1)


This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.
4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1
convergence mode.
4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.
4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4.1 Overview of the Working Mode


Each port on the TOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.

The TOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 4-1. You can set the port
working modes on the NMS.

Table 4-1 Port working modes on the TOA board

Configuration Scenario Port Working Mode Mapping Path

4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 ODU0 non-convergence Any->ODU0


non-convergence mode mode
(Any->ODU0)

4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 ODU1 non-convergence OTU1/Any->ODU1


non-convergence mode mode
(Any->ODU1)

4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 ODU1 convergence mode n x Any->ODU1 (1 n 8)


convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1)

4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0


ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex ODUflex non- Any->ODUflex


non-convergence mode convergence mode
(Any->ODUflex)

- None (not for ports) -

NOTE

None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are released to
other ports.

4.2 Configuration Procedures


Six port working modes are available for the TOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.

General Configuration Procedure


Figure 4-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the
TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-1 General configuration procedure

Configure the port


working mode

Configure the
port type

Configure the timeslot


configuration mode for
the line board

Configure the
service mode

Configure the
service type

Configure the
ODUflex tolerance for
the line board

Configure cross-
connections from the
client side to LP ports

Configure inter- Mandatory


board cross-
connections Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optional
actions vary according to port working modes.
The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:
l Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port when
colored optical signals are received on the client side.
l Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must
be set for the line board that is interconnected with the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

When the port working mode of the TOA board is ODUflex, ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random for the line board that is
interconnected with the TOA board.
In other port working modes, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the line
board to the same as the value that is set on the interconnected line board. The
recommended value is Assign random.
l Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must be
set to OTN Mode first.
l Configure the ODUflex tolerance(ppm): For the line board which is interconnected with
the TOA board, configure this parameter when the port of the TOA board works in
ODUflex mode. This parameter is reserved and optional in configuring service types
which are currently supported.
l Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP ports:
Compatible Mode: This action is required only for the ODU0 non-convergence
mode and ODU1 convergence mode.
Standard Mode: This action is required only for the ODU1 convergence mode.

The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for each
mode.

l Table 4-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.
l Table 4-3 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 non-convergence mode.
l Table 4-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 convergence mode.
l Table 4-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.
l Table 4-6 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence
mode.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 4-2 Configuration procedure

No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Optional


working mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working
Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0). If the default value is used, skip this step.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

3 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), GE(TTT-GMP),
STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-
ASI, ESCON, and SDI.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each
ClientLP port. Set the service type for only one of the two
channels. When the TOA board is interconnected with a
TN52TOM board, the channel where you set the service type must
be the same as the channel where the service type is set on the
TN52TOM board. When the TOA board is interconnected with
another board, set the service type for channel 1.
This note is only for the compatible mode. Services in standard
mode are configured at RX/TX ports.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

4 Configure cross- When services are in compatible mode, it is mandatory to


connections from the configure this parameter. But when services are in standard
client side to ClientLP mode, this parameter does not need to be configured.
ports on the TOA l Parameter settings:
board.
Level and Service Type:
If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) or
GE(TTT-GMP) in step 3, retain the default
value (GE) for Level.
If you set Service Type to a value other than GE
in step 3, set Level to Any and then set Service
Type to the same value that you set in step 3.
Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.
Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the
ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed.
Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
3(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).
Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.
Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/
ClientLP8). Ensure that the client-side port matches
an ClientLP port. That is, if you set the source
optical port to RXi/TXi, set the sink optical port to
ClientLPi.
Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel
for which you configure the service type in step 3.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from the client side to each ClientLP port. For details
about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-
>ODU0) for each sink optical port.

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 4-3 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1
non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the service Optional


mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Service Mode
is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU1,
set Service Mode to OTN Mode.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service
Mode.

4 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are HD-SDI, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON
Express, and OTU1. The total received service
bandwidth cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Convergence Mode

Table 4-4 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to ODU1
convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are ANY, FE, FDDI, GE(GFP-T), FC100, FC200,
DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, SDI, HDSDI, HDSDIRBR, FICON, and
FICON Express.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
l Only channel 1, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, in
each group of ClientLP ports can receive services with rates
higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by each group of ClientLP
ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by all ClientLP ports from
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8,
cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.
The preceding ClientLP ports are only for configuring service
types in compatible mode. in standard mode, RX/TX ports are
configured. 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 in compatible mode
corresponds to 3(RX1/TX1) in standard mode. The rest follows the
same principle.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

4 Configure cross- Mandatory


connections from the l Parameter settings:
client side to ClientLP
ports on the TOA Level and Service Type:
board. If you set Service Type to GE(GFP-T) in step 3,
retain the default value (GE) for Level.
If you set Service Type to a value other than GE
in step 3, set Level to Any and then set Service
Type to the same value that you set in step 3.
Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.
Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the
ID of the slot where the TOA board is housed.
Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
3(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).
Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.
Sink Optical Port:
Compatible Mode: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)
Standard Mode: 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)
to 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8)
Sink Optical Channel: Set it to a value in the range
of 1 to 8, which is the ID of the channel for which
you configure the service type in step 3.
l Configuration principles: There is no mapping between
client-side ports and ClientLP ports. For example, if
you set the source optical port to 3(RX1/TX1), you can
set the sink optical port to any of the ports from 201 to
208.
NOTE
However, for a board in compatible mode, when STM-16
services are received on the client side, these services must be
provisioned on the first optical channel of each ClientLP port,
and the client-side ports must map to intra-board logical ports.
For example, services from 3(RX1/TX1)-1 must be cross-
connected to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, services from
4(TX2/RX2)-1 must be cross-connected to 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1, and so on.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from the client side to each ClientLP port. For details
about the configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any-
>ODU1) for each sink optical port.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 Mode

Table 4-5 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the service Mandatory


mode. l Parameter settings: Set Service Mode to OTN Mode.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service
Mode.

4 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: Set Service Type to OTU1.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Service
Type.

5 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ODU0LP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODUflex Non-Convergence Mode

Table 4-6 Configuration procedure


No. Action Description

1 Configure the port Mandatory


working mode. l Parameter settings: Set Port Working Mode to
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Configuring the Working
Mode.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is
Client Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical
signals are received on the client side, set Port Type to
Client Side Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the
configuration procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the timeslot Mandatory


configuration mode l Parameter settings: The default value of ODU Timeslot
for the line board that Configuration Mode is Assign random. If the default
is interconnected with value is used, skip this step.
the TOA board.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the
line board that is interconnected with the TOA board
and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign
random for the required ports.

4 Configure the service Mandatory


type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service
Type are 3GSDI, 3GSDIRBR and FC400.
l Operation description: Configure the service type based
on the service plan. For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

No. Action Description

5 Configure the Optional


ODUflex l Parameter settings: For the transmission of 3GSDI or
tolerance(ppm) for the 3GSDIRBR services, set this parameter to 10; for the
line board that is transmission of other services, set this parameter to 100.
interconnected with
the TOA board. l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the
line board that is interconnected with the TOA board
and choose Configuration > WDM Interface >
Advanced Attributes from the Function Tree. In the
displayed window, set ODUflex tolerance(ppm) for the
required ports.

6 Configure inter-board Mandatory


cross-connections. l Parameter settings: See Table 4-7.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections
from each ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards. For details about the configuration procedure,
see Creating Cross-Connections.

Table 4-7 Parameters for configuring inter-board cross-connections


Param ODU0 Non- ODU1 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex
eter Convergence Non- Convergence U0 Mode Non-
Mode Convergen Mode Convergen
ce Mode ce Mode

Level ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODUflex

Service - - - - Custom,
Type PACKET,
FC400,
FC800, or
3GSDI
NOTE
For the TOA
board, only
support
FC400 and
3GSDI.

Directi Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional


on

Source ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot
Slot where the where the where the where the where the
TOA board is TOA board TOA board is TOA board TOA board
housed is housed housed is housed is housed

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Param ODU0 Non- ODU1 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex


eter Convergence Non- Convergence U0 Mode Non-
Mode Convergen Mode Convergen
ce Mode ce Mode

Source l Compatible l Compatib l Compatible l Compatib l Compatib


Optical Mode: le Mode: Mode: le Mode: le Mode:
Port 201(Client 201(Clien 201(Client 161(ODU 201(Clien
LP1/ tLP1/ LP1/ 0LP1/ tLP1/
ClientLP1) ClientLP ClientLP1) ODU0LP ClientLP
to 1) to to 1) to 1) to
208(Client 208(Clien 208(Client 168(ODU 208(Clien
LP8/ tLP8/ LP8/ 0LP8/ tLP8/
ClientLP8) ClientLP ClientLP8) ODU0LP ClientLP
l Standard 8) l Standard 8) 8)
Mode: l Standard Mode: l Standard l Standard
3(RX1/ Mode: 201(ConvG Mode: Mode:
TX1) to 3(RX1/ roup1/ 3(RX1/ 3(RX1/
10(RX8/ TX1) to ConvGroup TX1) to TX1) to
TX8) 10(RX8/ 1) to 10(RX8/ 10(RX8/
TX8) 208(ConvG TX8) TX8)
roup8/
ConvGroup
8)

Source 1 1 1 1 or 2 1
Optical
Channe
l

Sink ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot ID of the slot TN53NQ2,
Slot where the where the where the where the TN53ND2,
interconnected interconnecte interconnected interconnecte TN53NS2
board is d board is board is d board is
houseda houseda houseda houseda

Sink Example: Example: Example: Example: 1(IN1/


Optical 161(ODU0LP 51(ODU1LP 51(ODU1LP1/ 161(ODU0L OUT1) to
Port 1/ODU0LP1) 1/ ODU1LP1) P1/ 2(IN2/
ODU1LP1) ODU0LP1) OUT2)

Sink 1 or 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 1 or 2 OCH:1-
Optical ODU2:1-
Channe ODUflex:1
l to OCH:1-
ODU2:1-
ODUflex:2

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Param ODU0 Non- ODU1 ODU1 ODU1_OD ODUflex


eter Convergence Non- Convergence U0 Mode Non-
Mode Convergen Mode Convergen
ce Mode ce Mode

Occupi - - - - It cannot be
ed set manually.
ODUT l The value
Uk is 4 when
Timesl the
ots service
type is
FC400.
l The value
is 3 when
the
service
type is
3GSDI.

Service - - - - The
Rate(bi parameter
t/s) value is
automatically
displayed
according to
the value of
Occupied
ODUTUk
Timeslots.

l There is no mapping between source optical ports and sink optical ports. For example, if
you set the source optical port to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1), you can set the sink optical
port to 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) or any other ODU0LP port on the board in the sink
slot.
l a: The interconnected board can be
Standard mode:
TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2
Compatible mode:
TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 /
TN54NPO2 / TN54ENQ2

4.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Legend Information
Figure 4-2 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-2 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-3 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode.

Figure 4-3 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0))
8xODU0 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 8xODU0

TX1 TOA TOA TX1

1 1 M M 1 1
RX1 RX1
U U
FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/ X X FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/
8ODU0

8ODU0
8ODU0

8ODU0
N N
8Any

8Any
STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/ / / STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/
S D S
FC100/FICON/DVB- D FC100/FICON/DVB-
2 M 2
ASI/ESCON/SDI TX8 M TX8 ASI/ESCON/SDI
U U
8 8 8 8
RX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-4 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2

Line/PID board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Line/PID board in
compatible mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2
2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-5 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU0)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 mode

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1

Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board.Set Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-
convergence mode (Any->ODU0)
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

NOTE

l Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each ClientLP port. Set the service type for
only one of the two channels. When the TOA board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the
channel where you set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service type is set
on the TN52TOM board. When the TOA board is interconnected with another board, set the service
type for channel 1.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP ports on the TOA board. This
step is mandatory only when the TOA board is in compatible mode. While in standard mode,
implement Step 5.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

l The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOA board.
l In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service
Type to specific service, such as FE.

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink Optical Port.
l For each of the remaining seven services, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/
TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)
to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). The sink optical port number must match the source optical port
number. That is, if the source optical port is RXi/TXi, the sink optical port must be ClientLPi.
l Set Sink Optical Channel to 1 or 2. Set it to the channel for which you configure the service type in
Step 3.

Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards.

Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to ODU0
non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), note the following difference in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) through 10(RX8/TX8).The sink optical
port channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODU1)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-6 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-6 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-7 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode.

Figure 4-7 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU1))
8xODU1 2xOTU2 2xOTU2 8xODU1

TX1 TOA TOA TX1

1 1 M M 1 1
RX1 U U RX1
X X
8ODU1

8ODU1
8ODU0

8ODU0

N N
8Any

8Any

HD-SDI/STM16/ / / HD-SDI/STM16/
OC-48/FC200/FICON D D D OC-48/FC200/FICON
D
Express/OTU1 2 M 2 Express/OTU1
TX8 M TX8
U U
8 8 8 8
RX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-8 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU1))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line/PID board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 Line/PID board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 TOA

8(TX6/RX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-9 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence
mode (Any->ODU1)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 mode

Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
TOA
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board.Set Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-
convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

.
Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the TOA board to OTN Mode. This configuration is for the TOA board
in compatible mode, not in standard mode.
Operation Example:

NOTE

2
: The default value of Service Mode is Client Mode. When you set Service Type to OTU-1, set
Service Mode to OTN Mode

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Configure ODU1-level cross-connections from TOA board to other boards.


Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4
1

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

4
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to ODU1
non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).When the TOA board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8). The sink optical port
channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.5 Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)


This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-10 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-10 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-11 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU1 convergence mode.

Figure 4-11 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode
(n*Any->ODU1))
(1~8)xODU1 2xOTU2 2xOTU2 (1~8)xODU1

TX1 TOA TOA


TX1
FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC- M M FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-
RX1 RX1
3/STM-16/ U U 3/STM-16/
(1~8)ODU1

(1~8)ODU1

DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/ X X DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/
8ODU0
8ODU0

N N
8Any

8Any

STM-4/OC- / / STM-4/OC-
D D D
12/GE/FC100/ D 12/GE/FC100/
2 M 2
FICON/FC200/ TX8 M TX8 FICON/FC200/
FICON Express/SDI/ U U FICON Express/SDI/
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR RX8 X X RX8 HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-12 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-12 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence
mode (n*Any->ODU1))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 Line/PID
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 Line/PID
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatibl
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 e mode
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1


4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2

2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
6(TX4/RX4)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1

7(TX5/RX5)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1

10(TX8/RX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-7
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board a TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

(standard
mode)

Other board b TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


TN54ENQ2
(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-13 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence
mode (n*Any->ODU1)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Line/PID board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 standard mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 Line/PID board in
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 compatible mode
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4

Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ConvGroup1/Conv 201(ConvGroup1/Conv


Group1)-1 Group1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1

201(ConvGroup1/Conv 2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1
Group1)-8
202(ConvGroup2/Conv 202(ConvGroup2/Conv
6(TX4/RX4)-1
Group2)-1 Group2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
202(ConvGroup2/Conv TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1 Group2)-8
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
9(TX7/RX7)-1 208(ConvGroup8/Conv Group8)-1
Group8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
208(ConvGroup8/Conv
Group8)-8
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODU1
convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1).
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.

Operation Example:

Step 3 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.

Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

NOTE

l Only channel 1, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, in each group of ClientLP ports can
receive services with rates higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The total rate of services received by all ClientLP ports from 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to
208(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8, cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.

Step 4 Configure cross-connections from the client side to ClientLP or ConvGroup ports on the TOA
board.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

When STM-16 services are received on the client side, these services must be provisioned on the first
optical channel of each ClientLP port, and the client-side ports must map to intra-board logical ports.
For example, services from 3(RX1/TX1)-1 must be cross-connected to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1,
services from 4(TX2/RX2)-1 must be cross-connected to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1, and so on.
l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

The service type must be the same as Service Type in the WDM Interface window of the TOA board.
In this configuration, you can set Level to GE or ANY. If you set Level to ANY, you can set Service Type to
specific service, such as FE.

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode
is set to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), note the following difference in cross-
connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port and Sink
Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the
range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the TOA board is in
standard mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to
10(RX8/TX8) and Sink Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ConvGroup2/
ConvGroup2) to 208(ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8). The sink optical port number must
match the source optical port number. That is, if the source optical port is RXi/TXi, the
sink optical port must be ClientLPi or ConvGroupi.
Step 5 Configure ODU1-level cross-connections from ClientLP ports to the WDM side on the TOA
board.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4
1

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

4
1

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to ODU1
convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), note the following difference in cross-connection configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the TOA board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2) to 208(ConvGroup8/
ConvGroup8). The sink optical port channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.6 Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1-


>ODU0)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-14 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-14 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Application Diagram
Figure 4-15 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODU1 convergence mode.

Figure 4-15 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
16xODU0 2xOTU2 2xOTU2 16xODU0

TOA TOA
RX1 RX1
1 1 M M 1 1
TX1 U U TX1
X X
16ODU0
16ODU0
8ODU1
8OTU1

8ODU1
8OTU1
8ODU0

8ODU0

N N
OTU1 D
/ /
D OTU1
D D
2 M 2
RX8 M RX8
U U
TX8 16 16 X X 16 16 TX8

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-16 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Figure 4-16 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID board
in standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
Line/PID board
in compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1


161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1
1
162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2

9(TX9/RX9)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-1


167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-2
10(TX10/RX10)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

TOA Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board a TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2

(standard
mode)

Other board b TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


TN54ENQ2
(compatible
mode)

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-17 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Line/PID
board in
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 standard
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 mode

161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 Line/PID
board in
compatible
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
mode
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 3(TX1/RX1)-1
3(TX1/RX1)-2
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-2

TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-2
10(TX8/RX8)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-2

Multiplexing module Cross-connect module

The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which
needs to be configured on the NMS

Other board TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2 / TN55NPO2 / TN55NPO2E / TN54ENQ2


a

(standard
mode)

Other board TN52ND2 / TN52NQ2 / TN54NQ2 / TN52NS2 / TN52NS3 / TN54NS3 / TN54NPO2 /


b TN54ENQ2

(compatible
mode)

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0
mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.

Operation Example:

Step 3 Set Service Mode of the TOA board to OTN Mode.This configuration is for the TOA board
in compatible mode, not in standard mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Operation Example:

Step 4 The available values for Service Type is OTU-1 only.


Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Configure ODU0-level cross-connections from the TOA board to other boards.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

1
4

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2) to 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8). When the TOA board is in standard mode, set
Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8). The sink optical port
channel does not need to match the source optical port number.

----End

4.7 Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any-


>ODUflex)
This section describes the configuration process of the TOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.

Legend Information
Figure 4-18 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 4-18 Legend Information

Step Doubl Right- N Click to Step with


N No. e-click click input
N notes
N N

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Application Diagram
Figure 4-19 lists the condition where the TOA board works in ODUflex non-convergence
mode.

Figure 4-19 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex))
l 3G-SDI<->ODUflex
5xODUflex 4xOTU2 4xOTU2 5xODUflex

TX1 TOA TOA


TX1
M M
5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR

5x3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR
RX1 1 1 1 1 RX1
U U
X X
5xODUflex

5xODUflex
3G-SDI N / N 3G-SDI
5 /
3G-SDIRBR Q Q 5 3G-SDIRBR
D D
2 M 2
TX8 M TX8
U U
5 5 5 5
RX8 X X RX8

l FC400/FICON4G<->ODUflex
4xODUflex 4xOTU2 4xOTU2 4xODUflex

TX1 TOA TOA


TX1
RX1 1 1 M M 1 1

4xFC400/FICON4G
RX1
4xFC400/FICON4G

U U
X X

4xODUflex
4xODUflex

N / N
4xFC400/ 4 / 4xFC400/
Q D Q 4
FICON4G D FICON4G
2 M 2
TX8 M TX8
U U
4 4 4 4
RX8 X X RX8

Cross-Connection Diagram
Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 shows the port configuration of the TOA board.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-20 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 5: ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex))(compatible mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Line board
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
1 2
4(TX2/RX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1
TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1

The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2


board

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Figure 4-21 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (Scenario 5: ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)) (standard mode)
WDM side

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
Line board 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Cross-connect module

Client side

3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 TOA
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect module

The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS

Other TN53ND2 / TN53NQ2 / TN53NS2


board

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the working mode for the TOA board. Set Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-
convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

4 3

Step 2 Optional: According to the network plan, set the port type in Path View.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

Step 3 Optional: The available values for ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random
only.
Operation Example:

Step 4 Configure Service Type of the TOA board according to the service planning.
Operation Example:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

NOTICE
Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.

Step 5 Configure ODUflex-level cross-connections from ClientLP port on the TOA board to other
boards.
Operation Example:
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

1
4

l When the TOA board is in standard mode, set the cross-connection parameters as
follows.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring the THA/TOA Board (Manually by Station)

1
4

NOTE

3
: When the service type is set to 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR, a maximum of five cross-connections
can be configured; for service type FC400/FICON4G, a maximum of four cross-connections.
The preceding configuration is for port 3 (RX1/TX1). For other ports, if Port Working Mode is set to
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), note the following difference in cross-connection
configuration:
l Retain the same values for the other parameters except Source Optical Port.
l When the TOA board is in compatible mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8). When the TOA board is in standard
mode, set Source Optical Port to a value in the range of 4(RX2/TX2) to 10(RX8/TX8). The value
of Sink Optical Channel is automatically generated by the system.

----End

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by


Station)

About This Chapter

The LOA board can be configured with different port working modes and is applicable to five
scenarios accordingly. You need to manually configure the board by station on the NMS for
the application scenarios.

5.1 Overview of the Working Mode


Each port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.
5.2 Configuration Procedures
Six port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.
5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU0 non-
convergence mode.
5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU1 non-
convergence mode.
5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0
mode.
5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODUflex non-
convergence mode.
5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
This section describes the configuration process of the LOA board works in ODU2 non-
convergence mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

5.1 Overview of the Working Mode


Each port on the LOA board can work in different modes so that services can be processed on
different paths.

The LOA board supports six port working modes listed in Table 5-1. You can set the port
working modes on the NMS.

Table 5-1 Port working modes on the LOA board


Configuration Scenario Port Working Mode Mapping Path

5.3 Scenario 1: ODU0 non- ODU0 non-convergence Any->ODU0[->ODU1]-


convergence mode (Any- mode >ODU2->OTU2
>ODU0[->ODU1]-
>ODU2->OTU2)

5.4 Scenario 2: ODU1 non- ODU1 non-convergence OTU1/Any->ODU1->ODU2-


convergence mode (OTU1/ mode >OTU2
Any->ODU1->ODU2-
>OTU2)

5.5 Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[-


ODU1_ODU0 mode >ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

5.6 Scenario 4: ODUflex ODUflex non- Any->ODUflex->ODU2-


non-convergence mode convergence mode >OTU2
(Any->ODUflex->ODU2-
>OTU2)

5.7 Scenario 5: ODU2 non- ODU2 non-convergence Any->ODU2->OTU2


convergence mode (Any- mode
>ODU2->OTU2)

- None (not for ports) -

NOTE

l [->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in ODU0 non-convergence mode, two
service signal flows are available: Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2 and Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>ODU2->OTU2.
l None (not for ports): indicates that the resources at the port in this mode are not used and are
released to other ports.

5.2 Configuration Procedures


Six port working modes are available for the LOA board on the NMS. The port for the None
(not for ports) mode does not require configurations. The other five modes require
configurations.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

General Configuration Procedure


Figure 5-1 shows the general configuration procedure for the port working modes on the
LOA board.

Figure 5-1 General configuration procedure

Configure the port


working mode

Configure the
port type

Configure the timeslot


configuration mode

Configure the
service mode

Configure the
service type

Configure the
ODUflex tolerance for
the line board

Configure cross-
connections from the
client side to LP ports

Configure ODU0-level Mandatory


cross-connections from
LP ports to the WDM side Optional

In the flowchart, the mandatory actions are required for each port working mode and optional
actions vary according to port working modes.

The optional actions must be configured in the following scenarios:

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

l Configure the port type: Port Type must be set to Client Side Color Optical Port when
colored optical signals are received on the client side.
l Configure the timeslot configuration mode: ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode must
be set for the line side of the LOA board.
When the signal flow is from ODU0 or ODUflex to ODU2, ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode must be set to Assign random.
When the signal flow is ODU0 -> ODU1 -> ODU2, ODU Timeslot Configuration
Mode must be set to Assign consecutive.
When the signal flow is from Any or ODU1 to ODU2 directly, ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode can be set to Assign consecutive or Assign random.
However, the value must be the same as the value that is set on the interconnected
LOA or line board.
l Configure the service mode: When Service Type is set to OTU1, Service Mode must be
set to OTN Mode first.
l Configure the ODUflex tolerance(ppm): when the port of the TOA board works in
ODUflex mode, this parameter can be configured. This parameter is reserved and
optional in configuring service types which are currently supported.
l Configure cross-connections from the client side to LP ports: This action is required only
for the ODU0 non-convergence mode and ODU1 convergence mode.
The following describes the configuration procedure and involved parameter settings for each
mode.
l Table 5-2 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU0 non-convergence mode.
l Table 5-3 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1 non-convergence mode.
l Table 5-4 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU1_ODU0 mode.
l Table 5-5 describes the configuration procedure for the ODUflex non-convergence
mode.
l Table 5-6 describes the configuration procedure for the ODU2 non-convergence mode.

Configuration Procedure for the ODU0 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 5-2 Configuration procedure


N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Optional


working mode. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Working
Mode is ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[-
>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2). If the default value is used, skip
this step.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Working Mode.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

N Action Description
o.

2 Configure the port Optional


type. l Parameter settings: The default value of Port Type is Client
Side Grey Optical Port. If colored optical signals are
received on the client side, set Port Type to Client Side
Color Optical Port.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Modifying Port.

3 Configure the Optional


timeslot l Parameter settings: The value of ODU Timeslot
configuration Configuration Mode varies according to the two signal
mode. flows in the ODU0 non-convergence mode.
When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2,
set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to Assign
random.
When the signal flow is Any->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2-
>OTU2, set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode to
Assign consecutive.
l Operation description: In the NE Explorer, select the LOA
board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click By Function and choose ODU
Timeslot Configuration Mode from the the dropdown list.
Set ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode for the WDM side
port.

4 Configure the Mandatory


service type. l Parameter settings: The available values for Service Type
are FE, GE(TTT-GMP), GE(GFP-T), STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/
OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI.
l Operation description: For details about the configuration
procedure, see Configuring the Service Type.
NOTE
Two channels (channel 1 and channel 2) are available at each LP port.
Set the service type for only one of the two channels. When the LOA
board is interconnected with a TN52TOM board, the channel where you
set the service type must be the same as the channel where the service
type is set on the TN52TOM board. When the LOA board is
interconnected with another board, set the service type for channel 1.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

N Action Description
o.

5 Configure cross- Mandatory


connections from l Parameter settings:
the client side to
LP ports on the Level and Service Type:
LOA board. If you set Service Type to GE in step 4, retain the
default value (GE) for Level.
If you set Service Type to a value other than GE in
step 4, set Level to Any and then set Service Type to
the same value that you set in step 4.
Direction: Set it to Bidirectional.
Source Slot/Sink Slot: Set the two parameters to the ID
of the slot where the LOA board is housed.
Source Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
3(RX1/TX1) to 10(RX8/TX8).
Source Optical Channel: Set it to 1.
Sink Optical Port: Set it to a port in the range of
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8).
Ensure that the client-side port matches an LP port. That
is, if you set the source optical port to RXi/TXi, set the
sink optical port to ClientLPi.
Sink Optical Channel: 1 or 2. Set it to the channel for
which you configure the service type in step 4.
l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from the
client side to each LP port. For details about the
configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

6 Configure ODU0- Mandatory


level cross- l Parameter settings: See Table 5-7.
connections from
LP ports to the l Operation description: Configure cross-connections from
WDM side on the each LP port to the WDM side. For details about the
LOA board. configuration procedure, see Creating Cross-Connections.

Issue 01 (2016-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring the LOA Board (Manually by Station)

Configuration Procedure for the ODU1 Non-Convergence Mode

Table 5-3 Configuration procedure

N Action Description
o.

1 Configure the port Mandatory